JP6257386B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachislot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a replay game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  Such a gaming machine generally includes a main control board constituting a main control circuit and a sub control board constituting a sub control circuit. The main control board, for example, determines an internal winning combination, rotates and stops a plurality of reels, and determines whether or not there is a winning based on a symbol displayed on the display window when a plurality of reels are stopped. Control the main flow. The sub-control board controls the liquid crystal display device, the lamp, and the speaker to control the execution of effects by displaying sounds and videos.

  Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine that can detect that the ROM of the main control board has been replaced or tampered with by an unauthorized operation from the outside. Specifically, the main CPU of the main control board in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 calculates the identification information digest from the data stored in the ROM mounted on the main control board, and transmits it to the sub control board. . Further, the sub CPU of the sub control board determines whether or not the identification information digest received from the main control board matches the reference identification information digest stored in the HDD connected to the sub control board. If they do not match, a change notification message is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

JP 2008-206774 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it has not been possible to notify that the sub control board (sub control unit) has been illegally replaced.

An object of the present invention, considering the circumstances in the prior art, a control section and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying that it has been replaced incorrectly.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine configuration as follows.

A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 42 described later) and a first peripheral control unit (for example, an upper LED control board 240, a right LED control board 250, and a left LED control board 260 described later) connected to the control unit. A lower LED control board 270) and a second peripheral control unit (for example, an accessory control board 280 described later),
The control unit has identification information storage means for storing identification information (for example, a sub-ROM 72 for storing verification data to be described later), and the first peripheral control unit and the second peripheral control unit at a predetermined timing. Sending the identification information;
The first peripheral control unit is connected to a first notification device having a notification function (for example, an upper LED 21a, a right LED 21b, a left LED 21c, and a lower LED 21d described later),
First reference identification information storage means for storing reference identification information (for example, flash memories 242, 252, 262, and 272 for storing collation data described later);
First determination means for determining whether or not the identification information received from the control unit matches the reference identification information stored in the first reference identification information storage means (for example, one-chip CPUs 241 and 251 described later). , 261, 271),
First notification means (for example, one-chip CPUs 241 251 261 271 described later) for notifying the first notification device when the first determination means determines that they do not match,
The second peripheral control unit is connected to a second notification device (for example, an accessory rotation unit 122 described later) having a notification function,
A second reference identification information storage means (for example, a flash memory 282 described later) for storing the reference identification information;
Second determination means (for example, one-chip CPU 281 described later) for determining whether or not the identification information received from the control unit matches the reference identification information stored in the second reference identification information storage means; ,
And when the these do not match the second determination means determines second notification means for notifying the fact to the second notification unit (e.g., one chip CPU281 below), have a,
The first notification device is controlled by the first peripheral control unit and constitutes a light emission effect unit that is turned on and off with a predetermined effect pattern,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second notification device constitutes a movable accessory that is controlled by the second peripheral control unit and is movable in a predetermined performance pattern .

The gaming machine of the above construction, the sub-device, since control determines whether the identification information and the reference identification information received matches the control unit, to notify when not a match that effect, the control section It can be notified that the exchange has been performed illegally.

According to the present invention, it is possible to inform that the control section is replaced incorrectly.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 shows an internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a perspective view in a state where a front door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub control board and sub device group in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the communication LSI in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the AES circuit of the communication LSI in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the various subdevice in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the monitoring log | history screen in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the communication flow between the sub control board | substrate and GPU board | substrate in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the communication flow between the sub control board and 24h door monitoring unit in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the communication flow between the sub control board in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, an LED control board, and an accessory control board. It is a figure which shows the communication flow between the sub control board and sound I / O board | substrate in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the basic data format in I2C communication in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the other example of the basic data format in I2C communication in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for a small combination and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for spinning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table at the time of an irregular pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is the transition flow figure of RT state of the gaming machine in one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in addition lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table which adds G number in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BB ART lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR BR lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR1 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR2 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra addition lottery table during BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of additional addition during BR and promotion lottery table of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra game number lottery table for additional addition A of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition B of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra game number lottery table for additional addition C of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub storage area | region of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BR continuation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BR continuation determination time process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during normal in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of no operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine (pachinko) in a modification. It is an external appearance front view of the game machine in a modification. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game machine in a modification. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine in a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the game machine in a modification is provided.

Hereinafter, a pachislot machine that is a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the present embodiment, the winning probability of replay is displayed when an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot machine having a function of an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) that simultaneously operates with a function of operating a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a gaming state that is higher than usual, will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, re-games, bonuses, etc. are given to players, and other so-called “loses”. Is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is responsible for a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol.

  When the internal winning combination allowing the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually displays the symbol combination within the specified time of 190 msec (four symbols) for the winning determination line. The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is defined for one or more reels when, for example, a challenge bonus (CB), which is a second-type special accessory, and a middle bonus (MB) for continuously operating the CB are operated. The reel rotation is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. This winning determination means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that it is related to winning, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game.

  Further, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried out by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that is put on when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the present embodiment, the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4 is used to display an image and execute an effect.

Hereinafter, the display windows 4 are referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.
The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side) ). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are arranged in succession among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when rotation of a corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display two symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, the upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a line connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and includes a decorative frame 101 having two panel openings 101a and 101b exposing the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a decorative frame 101. And a transparent protective cover (not shown) for closing the panel openings 101a and 101b.

  The decorative frame 101 includes a partition piece 112 that partitions the panel opening 101a and the panel opening 101b. The two panel openings 101a and 101b are partitioned by the partition piece 112 so as to be lined up and down. The panel opening 101 a of the decorative frame 101 exposes the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the panel opening 101b of the decorative frame 101 exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The decoration frame 101 is provided with an upper LED (Light Emitting Diode) 21a, a right LED 21b, a left LED 21c, a lower LED 21d, a decoration unit 121, and a rotating accessory unit 122. The upper LED 21a, the right LED 21b, the left LED 21c, and the lower LED 21d are composed of an LED that is turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content, and a cover that covers the LED and has translucency. The upper LED 21 a is provided on the upper part of the decorative frame 101. The right LED 21b is provided on the right part of the decorative frame 101 when the pachislot 1 is viewed from the front. The left LED 21c is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 when the pachislot 1 is viewed from the front. The lower LED 21 d is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 101.

  The decoration unit 121 is disposed on the right side of the panel opening 101a in the decoration frame 101, and has an LED (not shown). The decoration unit 121 lights up with a color and a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect when a special effect and a predetermined effect are performed.

  The rotating accessory unit 122 is disposed on the left side of the panel opening 101 a in the decorative frame 101. The rotating accessory unit 122 has a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 123 (see FIG. 4), a stepping motor (not shown) that rotates the rotating accessory 123, and a light transmitting property. The cover member 125 that covers the cover 123 is provided. When a predetermined effect is performed, the rotating object 123 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal 12 has various devices (medal slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, select button) 29).

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited in the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The enter button 28 and the select button 29 are provided to select an arbitrary item from among a plurality of selectable items on various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In response to pressing of the select button 29, the cursor position for designating one item among the plurality of displayed items and the item to be highlighted are changed. In response to pressing of the enter button 28, the designated item is selected.

  The pedestal unit 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 digitally stores information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as payout number) and the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as credit number). indicate.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side opened. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls main operations of the game in the pachislot 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in the lower part of the cabinet 2a. In the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front). The power supply device 44 supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 in the cabinet 2a (on the right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front). The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the cabinet 2a.

  A sub-control board 42 that constitutes a sub-control circuit 47 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the upper part of the back side of the front door 2b (the part opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control board 42 controls the execution of effects by displaying images. The specific configuration of the sub control board 42 will be described later.

  A selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 is appropriate, and guides the medal determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor S <b> 46 (see FIG. 5) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46.

  In addition, a rotary shaft (not shown) extending in the vertical direction is provided at one end side in the left-right direction on the rear surface side of the front door 2b (left side when the pachislot 1 is viewed from the front). The front door 2b is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by being rotatably supported by a support portion (not shown) in the cabinet 2a.

  Further, a main door monitoring switch 31 and a sub door monitoring switch 32 are arranged in a predetermined direction in the vertical direction at the other end in the left-right direction on the back side of the front door 2b (right side when the pachislot 1 is viewed from the front). It is provided at a distance. Further, at the end of the cabinet 2a on the other end side in the left-right direction (right side when the pachislot 1 is viewed from the front), a main door monitoring switch 31 and a sub door monitoring switch 32 are provided when the front door 2b is closed. A switch abutting portion 33 that abuts is provided. The main door monitoring switch 31 and the sub door monitoring switch 32 are separated from the switch contact portion 33 when the front door 2b is opened.

  When the main door monitoring switch 31 is in contact with the switch contact portion 33, the main door monitoring switch 31 outputs a signal indicating the closed state of the front door 2b to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal plate 54 (see FIG. 5). When separated from the switch contact portion 33, a signal indicating a state in which the front door 2 b is opened is output to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal plate 54. Further, when the sub door monitoring switch 32 is in contact with the switch contact portion 33, the sub door monitoring switch 32 outputs a signal indicating the closed state of the front door 2b to the 24h door monitoring unit described later, and is separated from the switch contact portion 33. Then, a signal indicating a state in which the front door 2b is opened is output to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 (see FIG. 7).

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachi-slot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 41 disposed in the cabinet 2a and a sub-control board 42 disposed in the front door 2b.
The main control board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power board 44b of the power supply device 44. Yes.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motors. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 is electrically connected to an external concentration terminal board 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentration terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. This medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

  A power switch 44 a is connected to the power board 44 b of the power device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  Connected to the door relay terminal board 54 are a medal sensor 46S, a main door monitoring switch 31, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub control board 42. Yes. That is, the medal sensor 46S, the main door monitoring switch 31, the BET switch 62, the checkout switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub control board 42 are connected via the door relay terminal board 54. The main control board 41 is connected.

  The medal sensor 46S detects that a medal has passed through the selector 46 described above, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The main door monitoring switch 31 outputs a signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the main control board 41 as described above. This signal is output to the outside of the pachi-slot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 26 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch substrate 65 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 27L, 27C, 27R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 23 and an LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game or a mark for performing a replay.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 through a door relay terminal board 54. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to a sub device group 100, an enter switch 28a, and a select switch 29a, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the sub control board 42 determines effect data based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 41, input information from the enter switch 28a and the select switch 29a, and the like. Then, the sub control board 42 outputs the determined effect data to the various sub devices in the sub device group 100. As a result, a predetermined effect is executed by the subdevice.

  The select switch 29a detects whether or not the player has pressed the select button 29. The select switch 29a displays a signal corresponding to the selection operation content of the player, for example, a display mode (for example, indicating which item is selected from a plurality of selectable items displayed on the menu screen or the like) , An icon) is output to the sub-control board 42.

The enter switch 28a detects whether or not the player has pressed the enter button 28. Then, the enter switch 28a outputs a signal corresponding to the determination operation content of the player, for example, a signal indicating that the player has selected an item in the selected state to the sub CPU 71. That is, the player can select a predetermined item on the menu screen or the like by pressing the select button until the predetermined item to be selected is selected, and then pressing the predetermined item with the enter button.
The sub control board 42 and the sub device group 100 will be described later.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 42, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program. When the main CPU 93 executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 93 and performs various processes described later (for example, FIGS. 73 to 94 described later), the main control circuit 91 (main control board 42) The game processing operation related to the game of the pachislot 1 is controlled.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, for example, with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 27L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a simple design.

<Sub-control board and sub-device group>
Next, the sub control board 42 and the sub device group 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control board 42 and the sub device group 100 of the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the communication LSI of the pachislot 1. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an AES circuit in a communication LSI. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of various subdevices.

(1) Configuration of Sub Control Board 42 First, the configuration of the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control board 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 5), and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control board 42 includes a sub CPU 71 (sub control unit), a sub ROM 72, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) 73 (hereinafter referred to as sub RAM 73), and an SRAM (Static RAM) 74 (hereinafter referred to as backup RAM 74). ), A DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 77, a digital amplifier 78, and a communication LSI 79. The sub ROM 72, sub RAM 73, backup RAM 74, DSP 77, and communication LSI 79 are connected to the sub CPU 71, and the digital amplifier 78 is connected to the DSP 77.

Further, the sub control board 42 is a RTC (Real Time Counter) of a dedicated clock circuit provided in the sub CPU 71.
Time Clock) 70a (hereinafter referred to as a built-in RTC 70a) and an external RTC 70b connected to the sub CPU 71. Further, the sub control board 42 has a battery 70c connected to the SRAM 74 and the external RTC 70b. The external RTC 70b is a backup timing circuit for the built-in RTC 70a.

  The sub CPU 71 is composed of a CPU, and mainly performs video, sound, and light output control (effect control) in accordance with a control program stored in the sub ROM 72 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. . Specifically, the sub CPU 71 sends a command to the GPU board 220 (to be described later) to instruct to display on the liquid crystal display device 11 the video related to the animation data specified by the production content. In addition, the sub CPU 71 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output a sound such as BGM related to the sound data designated by the production contents via the sound I / O board 230 described later. Further, the sub CPU 71 determines the LED control board (upper LED control board 240, right LED control board 250, left LED control board 260, lower LED), which will be described later, based on lamp data (lighting data) specified by the contents of the effects. The control board 270) is instructed to turn on and off the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d by sending a command. Further, the sub CPU 71 has not only an effect control function but also, for example, various error monitoring functions.

  The sub ROM 72 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 71 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 60, and an effect registration task for determining and registering effect contents (effect data). , A drawing control task for controlling the display of the video by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined contents of the production, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the various LEDs, and the sound output by the speakers 20L and 20R. A program such as a voice control task is included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data (image data) related to video creation, BGM, and effects Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data (sound data) relating to sound and a storage area for storing lamp data (lighting pattern data) relating to light on / off patterns are included. The data storage area includes a storage area for storing a verification code (identification information). The verification code is a code set for each model based on the model name, the content used for the model, the model specification, and the like. The verification code is included in a “sub-control board verification request” that is transmitted by the sub-control board 42 when the sub-control board verification process described later is requested to the sub-device. In the present embodiment, the verification code is a code set for each model. Instead, a code unique to the sub control board 42 (or the sub CPU 71) may be used as the verification code.

The sub RAM 73 has a storage area for registering the determined contents of the effect (effect data), a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 60, and the like.
The SRAM 74 has a monitoring history storage area for storing monitoring history information to be described later.

  The backup RAM 74 is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the sub RAM 73. For example, data copied to the sub RAM 73 is backed up in the backup RAM 74 when the power is turned on.

  The DSP 77 outputs to the digital amplifier 78 audio data in a digital format that the sub CPU 71 selects based on the effect data. The digital amplifier 78 converts the audio data input from the DSP 77 into an analog format and outputs it. As a result, sound corresponding to the effect data determined by the sub CPU 71 is output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

  The communication LSI 79 is used for transmitting / receiving commands, data, and the like to / from various subdevices in the subdevice group 100.

(2) Communication LSI
Next, the configuration of the communication LSI in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the communication LSI 79 included in the sub-control board 42 and the communication LSI included in the sub-devices constituting the sub-device group 100 have the same configuration. Therefore, in the following, the detailed configuration of the communication LSI 79 will be described. Detailed description of the communication LSI will be saved.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the communication LSI 79 includes a dedicated controller 201, a setting register 202, a cache memory 203, an advanced encryption standard (AES) circuit 204, an external bus interface 205, a first DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller) 206, a second DMAC 207, 1st SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 208, 2nd SPI (not shown), 1st I2C (Inter-Interrupted Circuit) 209, 2nd I2C210, 1st Manchester circuit 211, 2nd Manchester circuit 212, 3rd Manchester circuit 213 and clock A reset control circuit 214 is included. These are connected to each other via an internal bus. The first I2C 209 and the first Manchester circuit 211 are connected to each other. The second I2C 210 and the second Manchester circuit 212 are connected to each other. Such a communication LSI 79 is configured by, for example, an ASIC.

  The dedicated controller 201 performs general control related to transmission and reception of commands and data. For example, the dedicated controller functions as a hardware timer, for example, and performs a timeout process during transmission / reception. The setting register 202 is a storage circuit having a function equivalent to that of a nonvolatile memory. The setting register 202 stores an encryption key used in the AES circuit 204, setting data related to communication specifications (for example, data indicating whether it functions as a master or a slave on communication), and the like. For example, data can be written to the setting register 202 through a second SPI described later when the board is mounted. The cache memory 203 is mainly used as a buffer. For example, the cache memory 203 temporarily stores commands and data related to transmission / reception. The clock / reset control circuit 214 generates a clock signal and a reset signal based on an input signal by an oscillator (OSC: Oscillator) or external reset, and controls transmission / reception timing and reset operation.

  The AES circuit 204 encrypts and decrypts data using a common key block encryption method. The AES circuit 204 includes a functional block based on an AES encryption algorithm and a functional block based on an AES decryption algorithm that is an inverse function of the AES encryption algorithm. The AES encryption algorithm encrypts plaintext data using a common key, and the AES decryption algorithm returns data encrypted using the same common key to the original plaintext data.

  Here, the AES encryption algorithm is a typical encryption algorithm of the common key encryption method, and the key length can be selected from 128 bits, 192 bits, and 256 bits, and the block length is, for example, 128 bits SPN ( This is a block cipher having a Substitution Permutation Network Structure) structure. Most block ciphers are repetitive ciphers that repeat the same round function in order to increase the implementation cost, and the SPN structure is a typical configuration method of repetitive ciphers. The block cipher is a kind of common key cipher and is a general term for ciphers that process fixed length data as a unit. Incidentally, ciphers that perform processing in bit units or byte units are called stream ciphers.

  FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the AES circuit 204. As shown in FIG. 9, the AES circuit 204 is composed of functional blocks that repeatedly execute a matrix operation of a predetermined number of rounds in units of steps. Steps repeatedly executed by the AES circuit 204 include a byte sub-step 204A, a row shift step 204B, a column mixing step 204C, and a round key addition step 204D as a final step. The number of times that these steps are repeatedly executed (number of rounds) depends on the key length. The key length is 128 bits, the number of rounds is 11, the key length is 192 bits, the number of rounds is 13, the key length is 256 bits, and the number of rounds is 15. It has become. However, in any case, the column mixing step 204C is not executed in the final round.

  In the byte sub-step 204A, first, the fixed-length input data is divided into, for example, 16 bytes of 4 rows and 4 columns, and each byte is replaced by an S box. The S box is a hardware-implemented basic function of the common key block cryptosystem, and provides a mechanism for breaking the correlation (linearity) between plaintext and ciphertext. The S box is excellent in resistance to differential cryptanalysis, and is excellent in preventing approximation by linear cryptanalysis.

  Next, in the row shift step 204B, each row of the bytes composed of rows and columns is shifted in the row direction based on a predetermined algorithm. Such row shift step 204B provides a mechanism that prevents different bytes in each row from interacting with corresponding bytes in other rows.

  Next, in the column mixing step 204C, the byte of each column that has undergone the row shift step 204B is multiplied by a matrix based on Galois field arithmetic. Such a column mixing step 204C provides a mechanism in which each byte in each column affects the other bytes.

  Next, in the round key addition step 204D, the encryption key (public key) stored in the setting register 202 is converted based on a predetermined algorithm, and the converted data is passed to the next round as a round key. Then, in round key addition step 204D, an exclusive OR is performed between the round key that is different for each round and each byte that has passed through column mixing step 204C or row shift step 204B. Note that the encryption key (public key) that is the original key with respect to the round key, the setting data related to the AES circuit 204, and the like are written into the setting register 202 through the second SPI (not shown) only once, for example, when the board is mounted. It is.

  According to such an AES circuit 204, the above-described byte sub-step 204A, row shift step 204B, column mixing step 204C, and round key addition step 204D are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds, whereby encrypted data is output. Is done. The encrypted data is converted into the original plaintext data by an AES decryption algorithm opposite to the AES encryption algorithm by the AES circuit 204. As a result, data transmitted via the communication LSI 79 becomes AES-encrypted data and is not easily deciphered. That is, it is possible to sufficiently prevent communication gotten by AES encryption.

  A first SPI 208 shown in FIG. 8 is an interface circuit for serial communication by a synchronous method, and is used for three-wire serial bus communication. The first SPI 208 can transmit and receive data at a higher speed than asynchronous serial communication. A plurality of devices can be connected to the first SPI 208. In the present embodiment, the first SPI 208 is used for communication between the sub-control board 42 and a GPU board 220 described later in the sub-device group 100 (see FIG. 7). Note that the second SPI (not shown) has the same function as the first SPI 208, and a description of common functions is omitted. The second SPI of this embodiment is provided with a dedicated terminal used when writing an encryption key, setting data, and the like to the setting register. That is, the second SPI is used as a connection circuit dedicated to a writing device such as an encryption key and setting data.

  The first DMAC 206 is a circuit that controls DMA (Direct Memory Access) communication using the first SPI 208. The second DMAC 207 is a circuit that controls DMA communication using the second SPI.

  The first I2C 209 is an interface circuit for serial communication using a synchronous method, and is used for two-wire serial bus communication. The first I2C 209 can transmit and receive data at a higher speed than the asynchronous serial communication. In the first I2C 209, a plurality of devices can be connected. In the present embodiment, the first I2C 209 includes a sub-control board 42 and a sub-device group 100 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, a sound I / O board 230, an upper LED control board 240, a right LED control board 250, and a left part. It is used for communication with the LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270, the accessory control board 280, and the 24h door monitoring unit 290. The second I2C 210 has the same function as the first I2C 209 and is provided as a spare for the first I2C 209.

  The first Manchester circuit 211 is a circuit that modulates (encodes) and demodulates (decodes) digital serial data in accordance with a binary phase-shift keying (BPSK) scheme. The first Manchester circuit 211 modulates serial data composed of an arbitrary bit string that does not include a relatively long string of continuous “0” or “1”, and also consists of the original bit string from the modulated serial data. Demodulate digital data. The first Manchester circuit 211 can embed a clock rate used for modulation in serial data. Basically, in the Manchester modulation system, a binary state composed of digital input values “1” and “0” is defined as a transition, and as a digital output value with respect to a rising edge and a falling edge of a signal input as serial data. Modulated serial data is generated by assigning logic levels of “0” and “1” or vice versa. At the time of demodulation, demodulation is performed in the reverse procedure of the modulation, and the logic level “0” and “1” as the digital input value, the rising edge and falling edge or the reverse of the signal to be output. The demodulated serial data is generated by forming the signal waveform.

  In the present embodiment, as specifically shown in FIG. 8, the first Manchester circuit 211 is configured to be paired with the first I2C 209 so that commands and data can be transmitted and received through the first I2C 209. The second Manchester circuit 212 and the third Manchester circuit 213 have the same functions as those of the first Manchester circuit 211, and descriptions of common functions are omitted.

  The second Manchester circuit 212 is paired with the second I2C 210, and is configured to transmit and receive commands and data through the second I2C 210. The third Manchester circuit 213 is provided for transmission / reception via the first SPI 208, and is configured to transmit / receive commands and data via the first SPI 208.

  In the present embodiment, the first to third Manchester circuits 211, 212, and 213 are provided in a preliminary manner, and whether or not communication is performed using these circuits can be arbitrarily set. In the following description, a mode in which communication is performed without using the first to third Manchester circuits 211, 212, and 213 will be described.

  The external bus interface 205 is a HOST, for example, read / write of memory of the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 42 (the GPU 221 and each one-chip CPU to be described later in the sub device), data for input / output device control and read / write. Is a circuit connected to a bus (Bus) for transferring. The communication LSI 79 is controlled by the sub CPU 71 and outputs commands and data input via the external bus interface 205 to the sub device group 100 (see FIG. 7) as necessary. Further, the communication LSI 79 outputs data input from the sub device group 100 to the sub CPU 71 via the external bus interface 205.

(3) Subdevice Group Next, the contents of the subdevice group 100 including various subdevices connected to the sub control board 42 and controlled by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 10. .

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the sub device group 100 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, two speakers 20L and 20R, an upper LED 21a, a right LED 21b, a left LED 21c, a lower LED 21d, a rotating accessory unit 122, and A sub door monitoring switch 32 is included. Since the configuration of these sub devices is as described above, description of these sub devices is omitted here.

  Further, the sub device group 100 includes a GPU board 220, a sound I / O board 230, an upper LED control board 240, a right LED control board 250, a left LED control board 260, a lower LED control board 270, and an accessory control board 280. 24h door monitoring unit 290. Note that the configuration of the sub device group 100 is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 7, and can be changed as appropriate according to, for example, the model of the pachislot 1. For example, subdevices other than the subdevices included in the subdevice group 100 illustrated in FIG. 7 may be further included, or any of the subdevices may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the GPU board 220, the sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270, the accessory control boards 280 and 24h doors. The monitoring unit 290 performs proxy lottery processing for performing various types of lottery instead of the sub-control board 42. Further, these sub devices perform a loading process for receiving and storing data (for example, various tables shown in FIGS. 57 to 70) necessary for the proxy lottery process from the sub control board 42. The sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270, the accessory control board 280, and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 are sub-controls. A sub-control board verification process is performed in which a verification code received from the sub-control board 42 is compared with a verification code stored by itself in order to notify of a gotten action such as an illegal replacement of the board 42.

[GPU board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the GPU substrate 220 is connected to the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sub control substrate 42, and controls display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on an instruction from the sub control substrate 42. The GPU board 220 includes a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 221, a VRAM (Video RAM) 224 connected to the GPU 221, a RAM 225, a flash memory 222, and a communication LSI 223. The GPU 221 performs image display processing for causing the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an image based on an image display command received from the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 42. Note that data necessary for processing performed by the GPU 221 is expanded in the VRAM 224 at the time of activation. The GPU 221 generates image data based on the data expanded in the VRAM 224 and supplies the image data to the liquid crystal display device 11. The GPU 221 performs a loading process and a proxy lottery process.

  The flash memory 222 is a nonvolatile memory. The RAM 225 stores data received from the sub CPU in the loading process. Since the communication LSI 223 has the same configuration and function as the communication LSI 79 of the sub-control board 42, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The GPU board 220 exchanges commands and data related to the loading process and the proxy lottery process with the sub-control board 42 via the communication LSI 223. Further, the GPU board 220 receives commands and image data related to image display processing via the dedicated bus 227.

[Sound I / O board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sound I / O board 230 is connected to the speakers 20L and 20R and the sub control board 42, and audio data is transmitted between the digital amplifier 78 of the sub control board 42 and the speakers 20L and 20R. Relay. As shown in FIG. 10, the sound I / O substrate 230 includes a one-chip CPU 231, a flash memory 232, and a communication LSI 233.

  The one-chip CPU 231 is a 32-bit CPU that includes a ROM, a RAM, a timer circuit, a counter circuit, an external bus I / F, and a serial communication (UART) circuit (not shown). The one-chip CPU 231 performs loading processing, proxy lottery processing, and sub-control board verification processing. In the RAM of the one-chip CPU 231, data received from the sub control board 42 in the loading process is stored. Various programs executed by the one-chip CPU 231 are stored in the ROM of the one-chip CPU 231. The counter circuit functions as a random number generator in the proxy lottery process.

  The flash memory 232 is a nonvolatile memory. The flash memory 232 stores in advance verification data (basic identification information) used in the sub-control board verification process. Since the communication LSI 233 has the same configuration and function as the communication LSI 79 of the sub-control board 42, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The sound I / O board 230 exchanges commands and data related to the loading process, the proxy lottery process, and the sub-control board verification process with the sub-control board 42 via the communication LSI 233. Further, the sound I / O board 230 receives audio data from the sub control board 42 via the dedicated line 234 (see FIG. 7).

[Upper LED control board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the upper LED control board 240 is connected to the upper LED 21 a and the sub control board 42, and controls the light emission of the upper LED 21 a based on an instruction from the sub control board 42. As shown in FIG. 10, the upper LED control board 240 includes a one-chip CPU 241, a flash memory 242, and a communication LSI 243. The one-chip CPU 241 performs a light emission effect control process for causing the upper LED 21 a to emit light based on the lighting pattern data received from the sub control board 42. The one-chip CPU 241 performs loading processing, proxy lottery processing, and sub-control board verification processing. Other configurations and functions of the one-chip CPU 241, and the flash memory 242 and the communication LSI 243 are the same as the one-chip CPU 231, the flash memory 232, and the communication LSI 233 of the sound I / O board 230, so detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The upper LED control board 240 transmits and receives commands and data related to the light emission effect control process, the loading process, the proxy lottery process, and the sub-control board verification process via the communication LSI 243 with the sub-control board 42.

[Right LED control board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the right LED control board 250 is connected to the right LED 21 b and the sub control board 42, and controls the light emission of the right LED 21 b based on an instruction from the sub control board 42. As shown in FIG. 10, the right LED control board 250 includes a one-chip CPU 251, a flash memory 252, and a communication LSI 253. The one-chip CPU 251, flash memory 252, and communication LSI 253 of the right LED control board 250 have the same configuration and functions as the one-chip CPU 241, flash memory 242, and communication LSI 243 of the upper LED control board 240. Detailed description is omitted here.

[Left LED control board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the left LED control board 260 is connected to the left LED 21 c and the sub control board 42, and controls the light emission of the left LED 21 c based on an instruction from the sub control board 42. As shown in FIG. 10, the left LED control board 260 has a one-chip CPU 261, a flash memory 262, and a communication LSI 263. Note that the one-chip CPU 261, flash memory 262, and communication LSI 263 of the left LED control board 260 have the same functions as the one-chip CPU 241, flash memory 242, and communication LSI 243 of the upper LED control board 240. Detailed description is omitted.

[Lower LED control board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the lower LED control board 270 is connected to the lower LED 21 d and the sub control board 42, and controls the light emission of the lower LED 21 d based on an instruction from the sub control board 42. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the lower LED control board 270 includes a one-chip CPU 271, a flash memory 272, and a communication LSI 273. Note that the one-chip CPU 271, flash memory 272, and communication LSI 273 of the lower LED control board 270 have the same functions as the one-chip CPU 241, flash memory 242, and communication LSI 243 of the upper LED control board 240, and therefore detailed here. The detailed explanation is omitted.

[Accessory control board]
As shown in FIG. 7, the accessory control board 280 is connected to the rotary accessory unit 122 and the sub control board 42, and controls the operation of the rotary accessory 123 based on an instruction from the sub control board 42. . As shown in FIG. 10, the accessory control board 280 has a one-chip CPU 281, a flash memory 282, and a communication LSI 283. The one-chip CPU 281 performs a drive control process for driving the stepping motor of the rotating accessory unit 122 based on the pulse pattern data received from the sub-control board 42. The one-chip CPU 281 performs loading processing, proxy lottery processing, and sub-control board verification processing. Other configurations and functions of the one-chip CPU 281, the flash memory 282, and the communication LSI 283 are the same as the one-chip CPU 231, the flash memory 232, and the communication LSI 233 of the sound I / O board 230, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The accessory control board 280 transmits and receives commands and data related to the drive control process, loading process, proxy lottery process, and sub-control board verification process to and from the sub-control board 42 via the communication LSI 283.

[24h door monitoring unit]
As shown in FIG. 7, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 is connected to the sub door monitoring switch 32 and the sub control board 42. As shown in FIG. 10, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 includes a one-chip CPU 291, a flash memory 292, a communication LSI 293, and an RTC 294 that is a clock circuit. The 24h door monitoring unit 290 has a battery (not shown) as a power source when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off. The battery also functions as a power source for the sub door monitoring switch 32 connected to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off.

  The one-chip CPU 291 has the same configuration and function as the one-chip CPU 231 of the sound I / O board 230. The one-chip CPU 291 performs loading processing, proxy lottery processing, and sub-control board verification processing. Also, the one-chip CPU 291 determines the determination result that the verification code received from the secondary control board 42 and the verification code stored in the flash memory 292 do not match in the secondary control board verification process, and the time when this determination was performed. The information shown (hereinafter referred to as collation result information) is stored in the flash memory 292. In addition, the one-chip CPU 291 indicates information indicating that the front door 2b is opened and opened, or information indicating when the front door 2b is closed and closed time based on the signal received from the sub door monitoring switch 32. Information to be shown (hereinafter sometimes referred to as door opening / closing information) is stored in the flash memory 292. Further, the one-chip CPU 291 communicates with the sub-control board 42 when no command data is transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for a predetermined time, in this embodiment, for 5 seconds or longer in the communication operation with the sub-control board 42. Is detected in the flash memory 292, and information indicating the detection result and the time when the communication disconnection is detected (hereinafter referred to as communication disconnection information) is stored in the flash memory 292. In the present embodiment, when the one-chip CPU 291 detects the disconnection of communication, if the command data is not transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for the above-mentioned 5 seconds or more, that is, the received data is due to disconnection or connector disconnection. In addition to the case where there is no error, the received command data is abnormal (for example, data is lost due to noise, etc.) or the command system of the received command data is not a predetermined (specified by the program) command system (for example, the specified range) External command data, other slave addresses, etc.).

  Further, the one-chip CPU 291 receives a monitoring history request, which is a command for requesting transmission of verification result information, door opening / closing information, and communication disconnection information (hereinafter sometimes referred to as monitoring history information) from the sub-control board 42. Then, monitoring history information transmission processing for transmitting the monitoring history information stored in the flash memory 292 to the sub-control board 42 is performed.

  Note that, as described above, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 has a battery that functions as a power source when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned off. Door opening / closing information regarding door opening / closing can be stored in the flash memory 292.

  Other configurations and functions of the one-chip CPU 291 and the flash memory 292 and the communication LSI 293 are the same as the one-chip CPU 231, flash memory 232, and communication LSI 233 of the sound I / O board 230, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. Note that the 24h door monitoring unit 290 is capable of monitoring the state in which the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off when the power supply voltage falls below a specified value (for example, + 10V when the supplied rated voltage is + 12V). The one-chip CPU 291 has a detection circuit (not shown), and terminates the monitoring of the communication interruption when the power interruption detection circuit detects the power interruption.

  The 24h door monitoring unit 290 transmits and receives commands and data related to the monitoring history information transmission process, loading process, proxy lottery process, and sub control board verification process to and from the sub control board 42 via the communication LSI 293.

  When the sub control board 42 receives the monitoring history information from the 24h door monitoring unit 290, the sub control board 42 compares the monitoring history information stored in the monitoring history storage area of the SRAM 74 with the monitoring history information not stored in the monitoring history storage area. Identify and add the identified monitoring history information to the monitoring history storage area. Further, when the “supervision history” menu is selected and determined on a menu screen (not shown) displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub control board 42 stores it in the monitoring history storage area of the SRAM 74. A monitoring history screen shown in FIG. 11 is created on the basis of the monitoring history information, and is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. The menu screen is displayed on the ideographic screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 when, for example, an attendant (hall manager) of a game shop performs operations such as changing various settings of the pachislot 1. The hall manager operates the select button 29 and the enter button 28 (see FIG. 2) on the menu screen to select and determine the “supervision history” menu.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the monitoring history screen displays monitoring history information, that is, verification result information, door opening / closing information, and communication disconnection information in time series. At this time, the most monitoring history information is displayed in the uppermost column (the column of the number “1”) on the confirmation screen. In the present embodiment, each piece of monitoring history information is displayed as a data set of “content” and “occurrence date / time” of an error. “OPNE” in the content column indicates that the front door 2b is opened, and “CLOSE” indicates that the front door 2b is closed. “NO MATCH” in the content column indicates that the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 and the verification code stored in the flash memory 292 of the 24h door monitoring unit 290 do not match. Also, “24h DSC” in the content column indicates that communication between the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 has been interrupted, and “24h RSM” indicates that the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 are disconnected. Communication has been resumed. The hall manager looks at the monitoring history screen to confirm that the front door 2b has been opened and closed, the verification code received from the sub-control board 42, and the verification memory stored in the flash memory 292 of the 24h door monitoring unit 290. It can be recognized that the codes do not match and that the communication disconnection with the sub-control board 42 has occurred.

(4) Communication of Subdevice Group Next, communication of the subdevice group 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the first SPI 208 of the communication LSI 79 in the sub control board 42 and the first SPI of the communication LSI 223 in the GPU board 220 are connected by an SPI bus composed of three signal lines. That is, data (including commands) can be transmitted and received by the 3-wire serial bus communication between the sub-control board 42 and the GPU board 220. In the three-wire serial bus communication in the present embodiment, data is transmitted and received by DMA transfer between one Master and one Slave. In this connection mode, the sub control board 42 functions as a master, and the GPU board 220 functions as a slave. The SPI bus is an SCK that is a signal line for a serial clock signal supplied from the sub control board 42 for synchronization, an SDI that is a signal line for data output from the sub control board 42, and an output from the GPU board 220. It consists of three SDO signal lines which are data signal lines. When a plurality of slaves are connected to one master and data is transmitted / received between one master and a plurality of slaves, the master selects one slave as a communication target from among the plurality of slaves (Select). The connection switching control is sequentially performed, so that data is transmitted / received after a one-to-one connection state is established with each slave.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the first I2C 209 of the communication LSI 79 in the sub control board 42, the sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, and the lower LED control board. 270, the accessory control board 280, and the first SPI of the communication LSIs 233, 243, 254, 263, 273, 283, and 293 in the door monitoring unit 290 are connected by an I2C bus composed of two signal lines. That is, data (including commands) can be transmitted and received between the sub-control board 42 and these sub-devices by two-wire serial bus communication. In the two-wire serial bus communication in the present embodiment, one Master transmits / receives data to / from each slave in a plurality of connected slaves. In this connection mode, the sub-control board 42 functions as a master, and the sub-device connected by the I2C bus functions as a slave. The I2C bus is composed of two signal lines, SCL which is a signal line for serial clock signal supplied by the sub-control board 42 for synchronization and SDA which is a signal line used for input / output of serial data. It is also possible to transmit data to all of a plurality of slaves connected from the master.

[Communication between sub-control board and GPU board]
Next, a communication operation between the sub control board 42 and the GPU board 220 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a time-series flow (communication flow) of transmission / reception operations of various data (including commands) between the sub-control board 42 and the GPU board 220. As shown in FIG. 12, the communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the GPU board 220 includes a startup operation and a normal operation. In the present embodiment, the data transmission operation from the sub control board 42 to the sub device is performed at a cycle of 33 msec regardless of the type of data to be transmitted.

(1) Startup Operation First, a startup operation that is a communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the GPU board 220 that is performed when the GPU board 220 is started (started up) will be described.

  First, when starting up the GPU board 220, the sub control board 42 transmits polling command data to the GPU board 220 (arrow C11 in FIG. 12). The GPU board 220 that has received the polling command data returns the command data of “initial data request” to the sub-control board 42 (C12).

  Upon receiving the “initial data request” command data, the sub control board 42 transmits the “loading request” command data to the GPU board 220 (C13). This command data is composed of data necessary for the proxy lottery process, for example, a command for requesting the GPU board 220 to store various tables shown in FIGS. 57 to 70 and data necessary for the proxy lottery process.

  When receiving the “loading request” command data, the GPU board 220 stores data necessary for the proxy lottery processing in the RAM 225. Then, the GPU board 220 returns “initialization complete” command data to the sub-control board 42 (C14). The start-up operation is completed by this communication operation.

(2) Normal Operation Next, the normal operation performed during the normal operation of the GPU substrate 220 after the startup operation will be described.

  The sub-control board 42 transmits command data of “lottery request” to the GPU board 220 when performing various lottery processes (C15). This command data includes a command for requesting the GPU board 220 to execute the proxy lottery process. The command data also includes the type of proxy lottery process that requires execution. Further, the command data may include parameters (such as a winning number described later) according to the proxy lottery process that requires execution.

  Upon receiving the “lottery request” command data, the GPU board 220 executes the requested type of proxy lottery processing. Specifically, the GPU 221 of the GPU board 220 generates a random number, and generates the random number and data necessary for the proxy lottery process stored in the RAM 225 by the loading process (for example, various tables shown in FIGS. 57 to 70). And the proxy lottery process based on the requested type of proxy lottery process). Then, the GPU board 220 returns the “lottery result notification” command data to the sub-control board 42 (C16), and notifies the sub-control board 42 of the result of the proxy lottery process.

  When the command data of “lottery request” is not transmitted from the sub-control board 42 to the GPU board 220 during normal operation, that is, when various lottery processes are not performed, the polling command data is sent to the GPU board 220 (C17). The GPU board 220 that has received the polling command data returns answer command data to the sub CPU 71 when there is no return data (such as “initial data request” command data) (C18).

In order to simplify the description, the communication flow shown in FIG. 12 shows a mode in which the command data of “loading request” is transmitted once. However, if the size of the data required for the proxy lottery exceeds the maximum size that the DMAC can transmit at one time, the sub-control board 42 sends a plurality of “loading request” command data to the GPU board 220. Send once. In this case, after receiving a plurality of “loading requests”, the GPU board 220 returns command data of “initialization completion” to the sub-control board 42.
Further, in the communication flow shown in FIG. 12, the transmission order of the “lottery request” command data and the polling command data is shown in this order. This is because the transmission of these commands is always in the order shown in the communication flow of FIG. It does not mean to be done. That is, the transmission timing of each command is changed depending on the timing of performing various lottery processes. Further, the sub control board 42 may transmit these commands a plurality of times during normal operation.

Further, in the communication operation with the sub control board 42, the GPU board 220 communicates with the sub control board 42 when no command data is transmitted from the sub control board 42 for a predetermined time, in this embodiment, for 5 seconds or more. It detects that a communication disconnection (communication abnormality), which is an abnormality in, has occurred. Specifically, the GPU board 220 causes the GPU 221 to function as a timer, and when 5 seconds have elapsed since the command data was received from the sub-control board 42, the communication disconnection with the sub-control board 42 has occurred. Detect.
In this embodiment, when the GPU board 220 detects the disconnection of communication, the command data is not transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for more than the above-mentioned 5 seconds, that is, the received data is due to disconnection or connector disconnection. In addition to the case where there is no error, the received command data is abnormal (for example, data is lost due to noise, etc.) or the command system of the received command data is not a predetermined (specified by the program) command system (for example, the specified range) External command data, other slave addresses, etc.).

  When the communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the GPU board 220 is resumed after the communication disconnection occurs, the start-up operation is performed in the same manner as when the GPU board 220 is started up. That is, polling command data is transmitted to the GPU board 220 (C19). The GPU board 220 that has received the polling command data returns the command data of “initial data request” to the sub-control board 42 (C20). The subsequent communication operation is the same as the startup operation at the start of startup of the GPU board 220 described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

[Communication between sub-control board and 24h door monitoring unit]
Next, a communication operation between the sub control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a time-series flow (communication flow) of transmission / reception operations of various data (including commands) between the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290. As shown in FIG. 13, the communication operation between the sub control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 includes a startup operation and a normal operation.

(1) Start-up Operation First, the start-up operation, which is a communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitor unit 290, performed when starting (starting up) the 24h door monitor unit 290 will be described.

  First, at the start of starting up the 24h door monitoring unit 290, the sub control board 42 transmits command data of “sub control board verification request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290. This command data includes a command for requesting the 24h door monitoring unit 290 to execute the sub-control board verification process. The command data includes a verification code stored in the sub ROM 72 of the sub control board 42.

  The 24h door monitoring unit 290 that has received the “sub control board verification request” executes the sub control board verification process. In the sub-control board verification process, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 determines whether or not the verification code stored in the flash memory 292 (see FIG. 10) matches the verification code received from the sub-control board 42. When it is determined that they do not coincide with each other, this determination result and collation result information that is information indicating the time when this determination is performed are stored in the flash memory 292.

  The sub control board 42 transmits polling command data to the 24h door monitoring unit after transmitting the command data of “sub control board verification request” (C22). The 24h door monitoring unit that has received the polling command data returns the command data of “initial data request” to the sub-control board 42 (C23).

  Upon receipt of the “initial data request” command data, the sub control board 42 transmits the “loading request” command data to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 (C24). This command data is composed of data necessary for the proxy lottery process, for example, a command requesting the 24h door monitoring unit 290 to store various tables shown in FIGS. 57 to 70 and data necessary for the proxy lottery process.

  Upon receiving the “loading request” command data, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 stores data necessary for the proxy lottery processing in the RAM of the one-chip CPU 291.

  The sub control board 42 transmits the polling command data to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 after transmitting the “loading request” command data (C25). The 24h door monitoring unit 290 that has received the polling command data returns command data of “initialization complete” to the sub-control board 42 (C26).

  Further, the sub control board 42 transmits the command data of “monitoring history request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 in the startup operation (C27). Then, the sub-control board 42 transmits polling command data to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 (C28). Upon receiving the “monitoring history request” command data and polling command data, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 returns the “monitoring history notification” command data to the sub-control board 42 (C29). This command data includes monitoring history information stored in the flash memory 292. The start-up operation is completed by this communication operation.

  In the communication flow shown in FIG. 13, in order to simplify the description, the command data transmission order of the “sub control board verification request”, “loading request”, and “monitoring history request” in the startup operation is shown in this order. However, this does not mean that these commands are always transmitted in the order shown in the communication flow of FIG. That is, the transmission order of these commands can be changed as appropriate. For example, the sub control board 42 may transmit command data in the order of “sub control board verification request”, “monitoring history request”, and “loading request”.

(2) Normal Operation Next, the normal operation performed during the normal operation of the 24h door monitoring unit 290 after the startup operation will be described.

  When performing various lottery processes, the sub-control board 42 transmits command data of “lottery request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 in a normal operation (C30). This command data includes a command for requesting the 24h door monitoring unit 290 to execute proxy lottery processing. The command data also includes the type of proxy lottery process that requires execution. Further, the command data may include parameters (such as a winning number described later) according to the proxy lottery process that requires execution.

  The 24h door monitoring unit 290 that has received the “lottery request” command data executes a proxy lottery process of the requested type. Specifically, the one-chip CPU 291 of the 24h door monitoring unit 290 generates a random number in the built-in counter circuit, and generates the random number and data necessary for the proxy lottery process stored in the built-in RAM in the loading process ( For example, the proxy lottery process is executed based on the requested type of proxy lottery process among the various tables shown in FIGS.

  The sub control board 42 transmits the command data of “lottery request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290, and then transmits the polling command data (C31). Upon receipt of this polling command data, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 returns command data of “lottery result notification” to the sub-control board 42. The command data of “notice of lottery result” includes the result of proxy lottery processing.

  Further, the sub control board 42 transmits the command data of “sub control board verification request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 in the normal operation (C33). The 24h door monitoring unit 290 that has received the “sub control board verification request” executes the sub control board verification process. The sub control board 42 transmits the command data of the “sub control board verification request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290, and then transmits the polling command data (C34). The 24h door monitoring unit 290 that has received the polling command data returns answer command data, which is command data returned when there is no return data (such as “initial data request” command data), to the sub CPU 71 (C35).

  Further, the sub-control board 42 transmits the command data of “monitoring history request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 in normal operation (C36). Then, the sub control board 42 transmits the polling command data 290 to the 24h door monitoring unit (C37). Upon receiving the “monitoring history request” command data and polling command data, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 returns the “monitoring history notification” command data to the sub-control board 42 (C38). As described above, the command data includes the monitoring history information stored in the flash memory 292. For example, when the manager of the pachislot 1 operates the enter button 28 and the select button 29 (see FIG. 2) to instruct the sub-control board 42 to display the monitoring history screen (see FIG. 11). In normal operation, the command data of “monitoring history request” is transmitted.

  In the communication flow shown in FIG. 13, in order to simplify the description, the command data transmission order of “lottery request”, “sub-control board verification request”, and “monitoring history request” in normal operation is shown in this order. However, this does not mean that these commands are always transmitted in the order shown in the communication flow of FIG. That is, the transmission order of these commands can be changed as appropriate. Further, the sub control board 42 may transmit these commands a plurality of times during normal operation.

  Further, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 performs (1) the sub-control board 42 in the communication operation when (1) no command data is transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for a predetermined time, in this embodiment, for 5 seconds or more. When there is an abnormality in the command data received from the control board 42, (3) When the command system of the command data received from the sub control board 42 is not a predetermined (defined by the program) command system, It detects that a communication disconnection (communication abnormality), which is an abnormality in communication, occurred. For the above (1), specifically, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 counts the elapsed time after receiving the command data from the sub control board 42 using the built-in timer circuit, and this elapsed time is 5 seconds. If it becomes above, it will detect that the communication disconnection between the sub control boards 42 generate | occur | produced.

  When the communication operation between the sub control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 is resumed after the communication disconnection occurs, the start-up operation is performed in the same manner as when the 24h door monitoring unit is started up. That is, the sub control board 42 transmits the command data of “sub control board verification request” to the 24h door monitoring unit 290 (C39), and also transmits the polling command data (C40). The 24h door monitoring unit 290 returns the command data of “initial data request” to the sub-control board 42 (C41). The subsequent communication operation is the same as the startup operation at the start of startup of the 24h door monitoring unit 290 described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

[Communication between sub-control board and LED control board / object control board]
Next, referring to FIG. 14, the sub-control board 42, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270 (hereinafter collectively referred to as the LED control board). Communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the accessory control board 280 will be described. FIG. 14 shows a time-series flow (communication flow) of transmission / reception operations of various data (including commands) between the sub-control board 42 and the LED control board and between the sub-control board 42 and the accessory control board 280. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 14, communication operations between the sub control board 42 and the LED control board and between the sub control board 42 and the accessory control board 280 include a start-up operation and a normal operation. In the communication flow shown in FIG. 14, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, and the lower LED control board 270 are collectively shown as an LED control board in order to simplify the description. The communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the LED control board and the communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the accessory control board 280 are shown in one communication flow. The communication operations of the LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270, the accessory control board 280, and the sub control board 42 are performed independently.

(1) Startup Operation The startup operation shown in FIG. 14 is a communication operation performed when starting (starting up) the LED control board and the accessory control board 280. Command data transmission of “sub control board verification request” (C51), polling command data transmission (C52), command data response of “initial data request” (C53), command of “loading request” in this startup operation Each communication operation of data transmission (C54), polling command data transmission (C55), and "initialization complete" command data return (C56) and the processes associated therewith are monitored by the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door described above. Since it is the same as C21-C26 (refer FIG. 13) of the starting operation | movement in the communication operation | movement between units, detailed description here is abbreviate | omitted. The start-up operation is completed when the command data “initialization complete” is returned (C56).

(2) Normal Operation Next, normal operation performed during normal operation of the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 after the startup operation will be described.

  In this normal operation, the sub control board 42 transmits the command data of “effect request” to the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 (C57). This command data includes a command for requesting execution of a predetermined effect. Further, the command data includes pattern data related to the effect requiring execution. Here, the pattern data is lighting pattern data indicating a lighting pattern if it is a normal operation between the sub control board 42 and the LED control board, and if it is a normal operation between the sub control board 42 and the accessory control board 280. The pulse pattern data indicating the pulse pattern for the stepping motor. The LED control board lights the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d according to the received lighting pattern. In addition, the accessory control board 280 drives the stepping motor of the rotating accessory unit 122 according to the received pulse pattern.

  The sub control board 42 transmits the command data of the “effect request” to the LED control board and the accessory control board 280, and then transmits the polling command data (C58). The LED control board and accessory control board 280 that has received the polling command data returns the command data of “status notification” to the sub-control board 42 (C59). Here, for the command data of “status notification”, the stepping motor of the rotating accessory unit 122 is driven by data indicating whether or not the lighting pattern received by the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d is lit, and the received pulse pattern. The data indicating whether or not is being included.

  Command data transmission of "lottery request" in normal operation (C60), polling command data transmission (C61), reply of command data of "lottery result notification" (C62), command data of "sub-control board verification request" Each communication operation of transmission (C63), transmission of polling command data (C64), reply of answer command data (C65) and the processes associated therewith are in the communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 described above. Since it is the same as C30-C35 (refer FIG. 13) of normal operation | movement, detailed description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the communication flow shown in FIG. 14, in order to simplify the description, the command data transmission order of “effect request”, “lottery request”, and “sub-control board verification request” in normal operation is shown in this order. However, this does not mean that these commands are always transmitted in the order shown in the communication flow of FIG. That is, the transmission order of these commands can be changed as appropriate. Further, the sub control board 42 may transmit these commands a plurality of times during normal operation.

Further, the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 are sub-control boards when command data is not transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for a predetermined time, in this embodiment, for 5 seconds or more in the communication operation with the sub-control board 42. 42, it is detected that a communication disconnection (communication abnormality), which is an abnormality in communication with 42, has occurred. Specifically, the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 counts the elapsed time after receiving the command data from the sub-control board 42 using the built-in timer circuit, and this elapsed time is set to 5 seconds or more. Then, it is detected that a communication disconnection with the sub control board 42 has occurred.
In the present embodiment, when the LED control board or the accessory control board 280 detects the disconnection of communication, the command data is not transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for 5 seconds or more, that is, disconnection, connector disconnection, etc. In addition to the case where there is no received data for the above reason, there is an error in the received command data (for example, data loss due to noise, etc.) or the command system of the received command data is not a predetermined command system (specified by the program) Cases (for example, command data outside the specified range, other slave addresses, etc.) are also included.

  When the communication operation with the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 is resumed after the communication disconnection occurs, the start-up operation is performed in the same manner as when the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 are started up. The subsequent communication operations C66 to C68 are the same as the startup operations C39 to C41 (see FIG. 13) of the 24h door monitoring unit 290 described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. Further, since the communication operation after C68 is the same as the communication operation after C53, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

[Communication between sub-control board and sound I / O board]
Next, a communication operation between the sub control board 42 and the sound I / O board 230 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a time-series flow (communication flow) of transmission / reception operations of various data (including commands) in the sub-control board 42 and the sound I / O board 230. As shown in FIG. 15, the communication operation between the sub-control board 42 and the sound I / O board 230 includes a startup operation and a normal operation.

(1) Startup Operation The startup operation shown in FIG. 15 is a communication operation performed when the sound I / O board 230 is started (started up). Command data transmission of “sub control board verification request” (C71), polling command data transmission (C72), command data reply of “initial data request” (C73), command of “loading request” in this startup operation Each communication operation of data transmission (C74), polling command data transmission (C75), and "initialization complete" command data return (C76) and the processes associated therewith are monitored by the above-described sub-control board 42 and 24h door. Since it is the same as C21-C26 (refer FIG. 13) of the starting operation | movement in the communication operation | movement between the units 290, detailed description here is abbreviate | omitted. The start-up operation ends when the command data “initialization complete” is returned (C76).

(2) Normal Operation Next, the normal operation performed during the normal operation of the sound I / O board 230 after the startup operation will be described.

  Command data transmission of “lottery request” (C77), polling command data transmission (C78), reply of command data of “lottery result notification” (C79), command data of “sub control board verification request” in this normal operation Communication operation (C80), polling command data transmission (C81), answer command data return (C82) communication operations and the processes associated therewith are the communication operations between the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 described above. Since this is the same as C30 to C35 (see FIG. 13) in normal operation, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In the communication flow shown in FIG. 15, in order to simplify the description, the command data transmission order of the “lottery request” and “sub control board verification request” in normal operation is shown in this order. These commands are not necessarily transmitted in the order shown in the communication flow of FIG. That is, the transmission order of these commands can be changed as appropriate. Further, the sub control board 42 may transmit these commands a plurality of times during normal operation.

In addition, the sound I / O board 230 communicates with the sub control board 42 when no command data is transmitted from the sub control board 42 for a predetermined time, in this embodiment, for 5 seconds or more, in the communication operation with the sub control board 42. It detects that a communication interruption (communication abnormality), which is an abnormality in communication between the two, has occurred. Specifically, the sound I / O board 230 measures the elapsed time after receiving the command data from the sub-control board 42 using a built-in timer circuit. It detects that a communication interruption with the control board 42 has occurred.
In this embodiment, when the sound I / O board 230 detects the disconnection of communication, the command data is not transmitted from the sub-control board 42 for 5 seconds or more, that is, for the reason of disconnection or connector disconnection. In addition to the case where there is no received data, there is an abnormality in the received command data (for example, data obscuration due to noise, etc.), or the command system of the received command data is not a predetermined (specified by the program) command system (for example, Command data out of the specified range, other slave addresses, etc.).

  When the communication operation with the sound I / O board 230 is resumed after the communication disconnection occurs, the start-up operation is performed in the same manner as when the sound I / O board 230 is started up. The subsequent communication operations C83 to C85 are the same as the startup operations C39 to C41 (see FIG. 13) of the 24h door monitoring unit 290 described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. Further, since the communication operation after C85 is the same as the communication operation after C73, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

[Abnormal warning processing between LED control board and accessory control board]
The LED control board (upper LED control board 240, right LED control board 250, left LED control board 260, lower LED control board 270) and accessory control board 280 are flash memories 242 and 252 in the sub-control board verification process. , 262, 272, 282 and the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 are determined to be inconsistent with each other. In addition, when the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 detect that the communication disconnection has occurred in the communication operation with the sub-control board 42, the abnormality control process is performed.

  Here, the abnormality warning process on the LED control board is a process of lighting the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d with a predetermined warning lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern at the time of production. Examples of the predetermined warning lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern at the time of production include a pattern that blinks shorter than the blinking interval in the lighting pattern at the time of production. In this way, the LED control board turns on the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d with a predetermined warning lighting pattern, so that a person who sees the LED 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d has a matching code in the sub-control board verification process. It is possible to warn (notify) that it has not been done or that communication interruption has occurred in the communication operation.

  Here, the abnormality warning process in the accessory control board 280 is a process of driving the stepping motor of the rotating accessory unit 122 with a predetermined warning pulse pattern different from the pulse pattern at the time of production. As a predetermined warning pulse pattern different from the pulse pattern at the time of production, for example, a pulse pattern in which the rotation speed of the rotating character 123 is faster than the rotation speed of the rotating character 123 driven by the pulse pattern at the time of production. Is set. In this way, the accessory control board 280 drives the stepping motor of the rotating accessory unit 122 with a predetermined warning pulse pattern, so that a person who sees the rotating accessory 123 that rotates faster than at the time of production (for example, a hall manager). In addition, it is possible to warn (notify) that the verification code does not match in the sub-control board verification processing or that communication disconnection has occurred in the communication operation.

[Basic data format of I2C communication]
Next, referring to FIGS. 16 and 17, the sub control board 42, the sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, and the lower LED control board. A basic data format in I2C communication between the H.270, the accessory control board 280, and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 (hereinafter also referred to as an I2C-compatible subdevice) will be described.

  FIG. 16 shows a data format when data is transmitted from the sub-control board 42, which is mainly a master, to the I2C-compatible subdevice. “S” at the beginning indicates that a start condition is issued to indicate the start of communication to Slave. After the start condition “S” is issued, “Slave Address” that is the address of the I2C-compatible subdevice of the main data transmission destination is transmitted. A unique “Slave Address” is assigned to each I2C-compatible subdevice. Subsequent to “Slave Address”, a control byte indicated by “W” is data indicating that this communication is communication for transmitting data from the sub-control board 42 which is a master to the I2C-compatible sub device. Sent. Subsequently, “DATA0” to “DATAn” which are data to be transmitted are transmitted. Then, a stop condition indicated by “P” informing the slave of the end of communication is issued. In addition, after “Slave Address” is transmitted and after each data is transmitted, an ack signal (data) is transmitted from the I2C-compatible subdevice on the slave side. Also, immediately before the stop condition “P” is issued, a Nack signal (data) is transmitted from the I2C-compatible subdevice.

  FIG. 17 shows a data format when the sub control board 42, which is mainly the master, receives data from the I2C compatible sub device. “S” at the beginning indicates that a start condition is issued to indicate the start of communication to Slave. After the start condition “S” is issued, “Slave Address” that is the address of the I2C-compatible subdevice of the main data transmission source is transmitted. Subsequent to “Slave Address”, the control byte indicated by “R” is data indicating that the sub-control board 42 in which this communication is mainly the master receives data from the I2C compatible sub-device. Sent. Subsequently, “DATA0” to “DATAn”, which are data to be transmitted, are transmitted from the I2C-compatible subdevice. Then, a stop condition indicated by “P” informing the slave of the end of communication is issued. Note that after the “Slave Address” is transmitted and before each data is transmitted, an ack signal (data) is transmitted from the I2C-compatible subdevice on the slave side. Further, immediately before the stop condition “P” is issued, a Nack signal (data) is transmitted from the sub-control board 42.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 18) that identifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, “0” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are set as symbol positions in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (direction of arrow A in FIG. 18) with reference to symbol position “0”. Assigned to a symbol.

  That is, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table. Can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “8”, the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the display window 4 are respectively “ Symbols corresponding to “watermelon”, “red 7” at symbol position “8”, and “bell 1” at symbol position “7” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and a payout number.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined that the prize is won. When it is determined that a prize is won, the player is given benefits such as medal payout and replay operation. In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. That is, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination column is data for designating a later-described display combination storage area (see FIG. 48 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the “paid-out number” data, the same number of medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and when any one of “C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP” is determined as the display combination, 13 medals are displayed. Is paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 22, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and when any of “C_14_BEL_A” to “C_14_BEL_L” is determined as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”, which are display combinations related to replay (replay) as display combinations. “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”, “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” to “C_CD_REP_I” to “C_CD_REP_I” When any one of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is determined, replay (replay) is activated.

  Note that the display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” shown in FIG. 22 are combinations that may be displayed when the display combinations related to “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D” cannot be established (missed). is there. The display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” are display combinations that are triggered when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 49) provided in the main RAM 95 when a bonus operation is performed, in a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter, and a winning number counter. It prescribes.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game to be operated. In this embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as bonus game types. The middle bonus is referred to as an accessory continuous operation device related to a so-called second type special accessory, and is hereinafter referred to as “MB”. The challenge bonus is called a so-called type 2 special bonus and is hereinafter referred to as “CB”. The operation of CB is continuously performed while the operation of MB is performed.

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not a prescribed number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operations of MB1 and MB2 that are started when “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” is displayed are terminated when medals are paid out to reach the prescribed number “13”.

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be performed in the operation of “CB”, that is, the so-called possible number of games. The operation of “CB” ends when one game is performed.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the RT gaming state transition conditions and the transition source and destination RT gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, five types of RT0 gaming states to RT4 gaming states are provided as RT gaming states, which are different in internal winning combination of replay and their winning probabilities. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the fact that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (the predetermined display combination is established) is the RT game. Triggers transition between states.

  Specifically, when the display combination relating to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_A”, “C_CU_REP_A”, and “C_CU_REP_B” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, when the display combination related to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, when the display combination related to “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_Oyama REP_A” to “C_Oyama REP_F” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state To do. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

In addition, when the display combination related to “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. And "C_O
When the display combination relating to “NE_A” to “C_ONE_E” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, More specific description will be given later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the gaming state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of lotteries.

  Specifically, when in the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for general gaming state is used, and “42” is set as the number of lotteries. In the present embodiment, in the MB (CB) gaming state, all small combinations (internal winning combinations related to the payout of medals) are determined as internal winning combinations. That is, the bits related to all the small combinations in the internal winning combination storing area described later are turned on. Also, the winning of “MB1” and “MB2” is invalidated.

  In the present embodiment, the general lottery state internal lottery table is used in the MB (CB) gaming state. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which an internal lottery table used in the general gaming state and an internal lottery table used in the MB (CB) gaming state are provided.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer associated with the winning number in each RT gaming state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. .

  The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer are data obtained as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and are defined by an internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 31 to 35) described later. This is data for designating the designated internal winning combination.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. And then. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). In other words, the winning number when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs) is won, and the data point assigned to the winning number is acquired.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  FIG. 26 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state is a table that is referred to when the player is in the RT0 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers 1 to 54.

  In the present embodiment, lottery values are defined according to settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided in order to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles at the game store side. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch (not shown) It is changed using.

For example, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviation “F_NMLRP1”) in setting 6 is 7000/65536. When the winning number “1” is won, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer. Note that “1” in the small role / replay data pointer corresponds to the abbreviations “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”.

  Further, in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning numbers “12” (abbreviation “F_R1_R2_KP”), “13” (abbreviation “F_R1_KP_R2”), “19” (abbreviation “F_KP_R4_R2_1”) to “22” (abbreviation “F_KP_R2_R2_2”). The lottery value of “)” is “0”. Therefore, when referring to the internal lottery table for general gaming state, the winning numbers “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are not won.

  When the winning numbers “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are won, “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are acquired as the small role / replay data pointers, Internal winning combinations relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are determined (see FIG. 33 described later). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state is not shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 27 shows an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 26) is the winning number in the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “19” and “21” are “3750”, respectively. As described above, when any of the small role / replay data pointers “19” to “22” defined according to the winning numbers “19” to “22” is acquired, “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are acquired. Internal winning combination related to is determined. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_RE”
There is a possibility that an internal winning combination relating to “P_I” may be determined, and the RT1 gaming state may be shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 28 shows the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT2 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 26) is the winning number in the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “14” and “16” are “10000”, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “15” and “17” are “6000”, respectively. It is. The lottery value of the winning number “18” is “10846”.

  When any of the small role / replay data pointers “14” to “18” defined according to the winning numbers “14” to “18” is acquired, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to The internal winning combination relating to “C_SBB_D” is determined (see FIG. 32). Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” may be determined, and the transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state may occur. There is.

  FIG. 29 shows an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT3 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 26) is the winning number in the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “20” and “22” are “5000”, respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “23” and “24” are “8000”, respectively. It is. When any of the small role / replay data pointers “20” and “22” to “24” defined according to the winning numbers “20” and “22” to “24” is acquired, “C_small Internal winning combinations relating to “V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” are determined (see FIG. 33). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may be shifted to the RT4 gaming state. .

  When the small combination / replay data pointers “20” and “22” defined according to the winning numbers “20” and “22” are acquired, the internal winning combinations related to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may be shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 30 shows an internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state. This RT4 gaming state internal lottery table is a table referred to in the RT4 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. In the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 26) is the winning number in the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state. The lottery value is defined according to “1” to “24”.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “12” and “13” are “13000”, respectively. When the small combination / replay data pointers “12” and “13” defined according to the winning numbers “12” and “13” are acquired, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” is determined. The Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, when the small role / replay data pointers “12” and “13” defined according to the winning numbers “12” and “13” are acquired, the internal winning combinations related to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may be shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  The winning numbers “28” to “33” in the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 26 may win in any gaming state of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Each is “2930”. When the small combination / replay data pointers “28” to “33” defined according to the winning numbers “28” to “33” are acquired, the internal winning combination relating to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” is determined. The

Therefore, in any gaming state from RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, “C_HA
There is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “Z_A” to “C_HAZ_H” is determined. Therefore,
The RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  The “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R that is permitted to be displayed along the active line. The “internal winning combination” is represented by 1-byte data in the same way as the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, and a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. Are assigned. The “O” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

  In addition, when the data pointer for the small combination / replay and the data pointer for bonus are “0”, the content of the “internal winning combination” is “losing”, which is the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 19 to FIG. Indicates that display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

  FIG. 31 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines an internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game for the bonus data pointer “1”. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 31, for example, when “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” are won as internal winning combinations.

  32 to 35 show a small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table defines internal winning combinations related to small winning combination and replay (replay) for the small winning combination / replay data pointers “1” to “42”. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

For example, when “17” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_C_REP”, “C_Oyama_REP_A” to “C_Oyama” are used as internal winning combinations. “_REP_F” is won in duplicate. Further, when “18” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_
“Oyama_REP_A” to “C_Oyama_REP_F” and “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” are duplicated.

[Cylinder stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The rotation stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

  The spinning cylinder stop number selection table of this embodiment defines a different spinning cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the data pointer for the small role / replay is “3”, the spinning stop number “3” is selected. When the bonus data pointer is “1”, the spinning stop number “67” is selected.

  36 in the spinning cylinder stop number selection table shown in FIG. 36 is in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state), and the small role / replay data pointer is “0”, “25 to 41”. Show the case. In this case, the rotating cylinder stop number “42” is selected. In addition, 1 and 2 of US marks in the spinning cylinder stop number selection table shown in FIG. 36 indicate a case in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state). For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “1” during the MB gaming state, the spinning stop number “43” is selected.

  In addition, although the number selection table for rotation stop of this embodiment prescribes | regulates a different rotation stop number for every data pointer for small roles and replays, this invention is not limited to this. In the spinning stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same spinning stop number may be defined for different small role / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines a correspondence relationship between the rotation stop number and various data used in a pull-in priority table selection process described later and a number of sliding pieces determination process of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation stop number, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push push The correspondence relationship between the table change initial data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is defined.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used for the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning stop number is defined, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 44). Data relating to the priority order of the display combination can be acquired.

  If the drawing priority table number corresponding to the reel stop number is not defined in the reel stop initial setting table, the drawing priority table selection is made with reference to the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 43). A pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

  The forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push table change initial data are used to specify a stop table (see FIGS. 39 to 41) to be referred to when the forward push is performed. It is data. The “forward push” in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the order of pressing “Right” and “Middle”.

  The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 42) to be referred to when irregular pressing is performed. In this embodiment, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is “middle left / right”, “middle right / left”, “middle right”. This corresponds to the pressing order of “left” and “middle right”.

  In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the value obtained. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the reel rotation stops (this is referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as a “stop start position”.

  In other words, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, the number of symbols passing through the middle stage area of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Referring to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a tentative one, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the reel.

  In the present embodiment, when there is an appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on a stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding symbols is changed with reference to (see FIG. 44). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to in order to determine the search order when the priorities are compared for each of the symbols from the stop start position to the 4th symbol position that is the maximum number of sliding symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referenced is properly used according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of the forward push, the first stop table (see FIG. 39) at the time of the forward push and the second and third stop tables at the time of the forward push (see FIG. 41) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table (see FIG. 42) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pushing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first stop table for forward pressing will be described. The first stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 39 is referred to when the table selection data for forward pressing is “01”. The first stop table at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence relationship between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the number of sliding pieces determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the number-of-sliding piece determination data is “0”, and the change status is “1”. The change status is used when referring to a forward pressing control change table (see FIG. 40) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the forward pressing control change table will be described. The forward pressing control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table (see FIG. 39) at the time of the forward press is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops is “12” at the time of forward pressing.
In the forward push control change table, if the change status and the second and third stop stop table numbers for forward push are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops and the stop table for irregularity when pushing forward define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  41 is referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for stop are “08”. The irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 42 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

  In the stop data specified by the stop tables of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity, is the symbol position associated with the stop data appropriate as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped? Has information on whether or not. The stop data includes information indicating whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the “A line” column and the “B line” column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by assigning information about which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  In other words, the second and third stop tables for stoppages and the stop table for anomalies at the time of forward pressing define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be varied based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to compress information.

  The determination of the number of sliding piece determination data is performed as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of “middle reel A line data” of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, referring to the designated bit string, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not “1” is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where “1” is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the number of sliding piece determination data.

  Whether or not the bit string to be referred to is changed from the “A line” column to the “B line” column refers to the “line change” column and “1” is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not. When it is determined that the line is to be changed, the column “B line” is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority table selection table number and stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination.
The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 44).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the “left reel first stop” column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the drawing priority table selection table number is “1”, “00” is acquired as the drawing priority table number. Even when the middle reel 3C is pressed in the second stop and when the right reel 3R is pressed in the second stop, “00” is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

  Further, in the pull-in priority table selection table, when the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Get as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the drawing priority table selection table number is “0”, the drawing priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the right column of the first reel first stop column corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection table number “0” is referred to, and “00” is acquired as the pull-in priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the drawing priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “04”.

  The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Each pull-in data is similar to “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 and “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 19 to 22. It is represented by byte data, and a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the one-byte data.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 39). However, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that allow the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired from the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, the stop display (withdrawal) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is prioritized over the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. To be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, not only the priority order of the internal winning combination differs depending on the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are “01”, “03”, and “04”, the priority number is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are “00” and “02”. In this case, the number of priority divisions is 1.

Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “01” will be described, and description of priorities in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
The priority order “1” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes “C_BAR_A”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, and “C_3_BEL_C1” to “_C_4”. The pull-in data corresponding to is defined.

  The priority “2” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes “C_BAR_B”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_C”, and “C_B_REP_H” to “C_B_REP_J”. Data is specified.

The priority “3” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”, “C_BAR_C” to “C_BAR_E”, “C_B_REP_D”.
To “C_B_REP_G” and “C_B_REP_K” to “C_B_REP_P” are defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table preferentially applies from the range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding frames (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding frames is 4) (hereinafter referred to as “search order”). ").

  The search order table defines the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and the search order. That is, in this embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. In addition, the search order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding frames having the same priority, and the search order table is applied in a higher order.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 88 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and the search order “1” is supported. The number of sliding frames is preferentially applied from the numerical value to be used.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the game lock according to the winning number related to the internal lottery in the RT4 gaming state. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. While the game lock is occurring, even if a closing operation or a stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

  In the game lock lottery processing of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is subtracted by a prescribed lottery value. To do. And then. The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). That is, the player has won the game lock when the subtraction result is less than 0.

In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 46, the winning number is “36” (abbreviated as “F_strong angle check”).
) To “41” (abbreviation “F_reach”), a lottery value to which the game lock is won is defined. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are “33” to “41”, it is determined whether to perform the game lock. For example, when the winning number is “37” (abbreviation “F_middle stage”), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 22).

  For example, when the symbol “lip” is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (lip) in the reel type “left”. “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 52) described later.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 95 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used for the various reel effects described above.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 26 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 26, when a predetermined bit is set to “1” (stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. Indicates. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 26, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”.

The main RAM 95 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). When “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is a combination of the corresponding symbols (for example, “Lip”-“Lip”-“Bell 2” of “C_MB1”).
Is not cleared until it is displayed on the winning determination line. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming state flag storage area is composed of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  In each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Indicates. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the MB (“C_MB1” or “C_MB2”) is being operated, and the MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 93 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol code storage area stores, for each active line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that was most recently stopped and the displayable symbols (symbol code storage regions 2 to 29). The After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Retrieve priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority data storage area, a priority data storage area is provided for each reel type.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table described above.

  The contents of the priority level pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority level data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority level table number in the pull-in priority level table (see FIG. 44) referred to when determining the pull-in priority level data. . The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 45).

  Although detailed description is omitted in this specification, the sub ROM 72 also stores various table data (for example, a navigation table) necessary for various rendering operations, and various storage areas necessary for the sub RAM 73 as well. Is provided as appropriate.

<Game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a transition flow of the gaming state between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” and “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of game states of “RT0 game state” to “RT4 game state” are provided as RT game states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 24) and controls the transition between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state”.

First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state becomes “RT0 gaming state”. Next, in the “RT0 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spilling eyes” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT1 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols related to “Bell spilling eyes” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state is “RT1 gaming state” ”.
“Bell spilled eyes” in this embodiment are “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HA” shown in FIG.
Z_H ”.

Furthermore, in the “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip A” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT1 gaming state”.
“Push order lip A” in the present embodiment is a display role of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_A” shown in FIG.

In the “RT1 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT2 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT2 gaming state”.
“Push order lip B” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” shown in FIG.

In the “RT2 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”.
“BB / RB Lip” in this embodiment is “C_BNS_A” to “C_B” shown in FIG.
NS_Z ”and“ C_SBB_A ”to“ C_SBB_D ”.

In the “RT3 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. Also, in the “RT1 gaming state” or “RT2 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”.
“Push order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

In the “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “lower bell” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state is “ Transition to “RT0 gaming state”.
The “lower bell” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when in the “RT3 gaming state”, and the second ART is executed when in the “RT4 gaming state”. The “RT3 gaming state” is shifted to the case where the display combination of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” is established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the symbol combination related to “C_BNS_A” is “red 7” − “red 7” − “red 7”. That is, there is a combination of symbols based on a design based on the number “7”, which is usually adopted as a symbol combination related to the operation of the bonus (other than this, it may be a design having better visibility than other symbols). When the stop display is made, the gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”, and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a “pseudo bonus”.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT1 gaming state, when the execution of the first ART is determined, the stop order (display assistance) for displaying the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” on the winning determination line. Information), and waits for the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” to be displayed on the winning determination line. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”.

  In the “RT2 gaming state”, display auxiliary information for displaying the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” on the winning determination line is notified. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state”. As a result, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the second ART is determined in the “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, or “RT3 gaming state”, the symbol related to “push order lip C” is displayed. The stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the winning determination line is notified. And it waits for the combination of the symbol which concerns on "push order lip C" to be displayed on a winning determination line. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. As a result, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is executed.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 55 is a correspondence table between internal winning combinations and stop orders, and shows the types of display combinations according to the stop order.

  “C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 55 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. “C_CD_REP” indicates a display combination (“C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”) in which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. In addition, “normal lip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to re-playing regardless of the transition of the game state.

  Furthermore, “C_BNS” indicates a display combination (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. Note that “C_BNS * 1” is most easily displayed when stop control is performed using the stop table, and “C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T” are not displayed. In addition, “C_BNS * 2” is most easily displayed when stop control using the stop table is performed, and “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_N” and “C_BNS_U” to “C_BNS_Z” are not displayed.

  “C_SBB” indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. “C_Small V” indicates a display combination (“C_Small V_REP_A” to “C_Small V_REP_C”) in which the transition to the RT4 gaming state (second ART) is determined.

  “C_3_BEL” indicates display combinations (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) that are not involved in the transition of the gaming state. When “C_3_BEL” is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to “C_3_BEL”, “C_9_BEL” indicates display combinations (“C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) that are not related to the transition of the gaming state. When “C_9_BEL” is established, nine medals are paid out.

  “C_ONE” indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

  “C_13_BEL” indicates display combinations not related to the game state transition (“C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP”), and “C_14_BEL” indicates display combinations not related to the game state transition (“C_14_BEL_A” to “C_14_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_A”). C_14_BEL_K "). When “C_13_BEL” is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when “C_14_BEL” is established, 14 medals are paid out.

  During the MB gaming state, either “C_13_BEL” or “C_14_BEL” can be established, and the game ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when “C_14_BEL” is established in the first game in the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state is terminated in that game. As a result, the player obtains 11 medals (14 (paid-out number) -3 (inserted number) = 11 (acquired number)).

  On the other hand, when “C_13_BEL” is established in the first game and “C_14_BEL” is established in the second game in the MB gaming state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) −6 (inserted number) = 21 ( The number of medals))) can be obtained. In the MB gaming state, the winning number “1” (rotation stop number “43”), “4” (rotation stop number “46”), “19” (rotation stop number “61”) , “21” (rotation stop number “63”) is determined, “C — 14_BEL” is established in the first game.

In the present embodiment, a combination of various symbols related to replays such as “C_CU_REP”, “C_CD_REP”, and a combination of various symbols related to “Bell” such as “C_ONE”, “C_3_BEL”, “C_9_BEL”, etc. The push order is set for each success or failure of the stop display.

  For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “12”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B” and “C_CU_REP_B” “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, “12” is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, “C_CU_REP” (either “C_CU_REP_A” or “C_CU_REP_B”) is provided on the condition that the stop order by the pressing operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left / right” or “middle left / right”. The combination of symbols related to is stopped and displayed.
Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_CD_REP” (any one of “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” or “middle right and left”.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) is stopped and displayed on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”. Is done.

In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “14”, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_O” to “C_B”
NS_T ”,“ C_BNS_Y ”,“ C_C_REP ”,“ C_B_REP_A ”to“ C_B_REP_P ”,“ C_small V_REP_A ”to“ C_small V_REP_F ”are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, “14” is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, “normal lip” (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left”. Any combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of “C_BNS * 1” (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_Y”) is stopped on the condition that the stop order is “middle left / right” and “middle left / right”. Is displayed.
Further, if the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of “C_BNS * 2” (“C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T”) The combination of symbols related to ()) is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the symbol combinations related to “C_Oyama REP_A” to “C_Oyama REP_F” are stopped and displayed.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “25”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B” “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”, “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “25”, “25” is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, “C_3_BEL” (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1”) is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “right and left middle”. (Any one of “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) is stopped and displayed.
Also, the combination of symbols related to “C_9_BEL” (any one of “C_9BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”.
Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_ONE” (any one of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “28”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_CHN_A”, “C_ONE_A” ~ "C_ONE_E" wins. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “28”, “28” is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, if the stop order by the pressing operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “middle left and right”, and the pressing timing of the stop button for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). , “C_3_BEL” (any one of “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”) is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, if the stop order is “middle left” or “middle left and right” and the pressing timing of the stop button for the rotating reel is other than a predetermined timing (incorrect answer), “C_HAZ” (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” The combination of symbols related to "any of the above" is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

  Therefore, when the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing (correct answer), three medals are paid out. If the stop button is pressed at a timing other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

In addition, the combination of symbols related to “C_9_BEL” (any one of “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”. As a result, nine medals are paid out.
In addition, on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”, “C_ONE” (“
The combination of symbols relating to any one of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” is stopped and displayed. As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described.
FIG. 56 is a correspondence table of the internal winning combination, stop order, and RT transition, and shows the transition destination of the RT gaming state according to the stop order.

  In the non-MB game state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, the symbol related to “normal lip” is provided on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”. The combination is stopped. Thereby, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the RT4 gaming state has not been determined, a notification is made that the stop order should be “right middle left” or “right middle left” (display auxiliary information) To do. As a result, the symbol combination related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. In other words, it is notified that the stop order should be “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” so as not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state.

In the non-MB game state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “14”, “C_BNS (* 1)” is set on condition that the stop order is “middle left / right” or “middle left / right”. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “BB flag” or “BB preparing flag” described later is on, the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right It is notified that “middle” should be set, and that “red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7” symbol combination stop display should be aimed (display auxiliary information). Thereby, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” (the symbol combination reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, and “ It notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7".

  On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “RB flag” or “RB preparation flag” to be described later is on, the stop order is “right left middle” or “right middle “Left” should be notified, and “Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7” symbols should be stopped (display auxiliary information). Thereby, the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” (the symbol combination reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be “right left middle” or “right middle left” and “ It notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7".

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “18”, the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” on the condition that the stop order is “left middle right” or “left middle right” Is stopped. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “SBB flag” or “SBB preparing flag” described later is on, the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right (Display auxiliary information) is notified that it should be set to “medium” and that it is desirable to stop display of the combination of symbols “white 7”-“white 7”-“white 7”. Thereby, the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” (the symbol combination reminiscent of SBB), it is preferable to set the stop order to “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, and “white 7” − It notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”.

  On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “SBB flag” or “SBB preparation flag” is OFF, the stop order is set to “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” Then, a message to the effect (display auxiliary information) is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed. That is, it notifies that the stop order should be “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB).

<Description of sub game state>
Here, the sub gaming state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various game states related to effects controlled by the sub control board 42 (sub CPU 71) are referred to as “sub game states”. In the present embodiment, the general state, CZ (chance zone), first ART (pseudo bonus), second ART, BR (battle rush) are set as the sub gaming state.

[General status]
The general state is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state. During this general state, basically, a lottery (CZ lottery) of whether or not to shift to CZ is performed with reference to a CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 57) described later for each game. When the transition to CZ is determined, lottery for determining the number of precursor games (hereinafter referred to as “the number of CZ precursor games”) until the transition to CZ is performed.

  Note that as the pachislot machine of the present invention, a CZ lottery table in which the number of precursor games until the shift to CZ is lottered simultaneously with the lottery of whether or not to shift to CZ may be used. That is, whether to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub gaming state executed during the RT0 gaming state and during the RT1 gaming state. When the transition of CZ is determined in the general state and the game of the number of CZ precursor games is consumed, the sub gaming state is shifted from the general state to CZ. Then, after the transition to CZ, notification that it is better to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) (hereinafter referred to as “navigating to the black BAR”) Is performed a predetermined number of times, CZ is terminated.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the first ART is determined when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) is consumed before the “navigating for black BAR” is performed a prescribed number of times.

  In the present embodiment, “CZ1” and “CZ2” are provided as CZ. In “CZ1”, “4” is set as the prescribed number of times of “navigating to aim at the black BAR”. That is, “CZ1” ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed four times. On the other hand, in “CZ2”, “10” is set as the specified number of times of “navigating to the black BAR”. That is, “CZ2” ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed ten times. Note that the number of times “CZ1” and “CZ2” “navigating to the black BAR” is managed by the CZ cut-in number counter.

  In “CZ1” and “CZ2”, when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing “navigating to the black BAR” is the same. The probability of executing “aiming for black BAR and navigating” when the specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, “CZ2”, which has a larger number of prescribed “navigating for black BAR”, is more likely to be determined to execute the first ART than “CZ1”.

  “CZ2” may have a higher probability of winning a bonus in bonus lottery than “CZ1”. In addition, as “CZ2” according to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the probability that a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is won is higher than “CZ1”.

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT3 gaming state, and is a so-called pseudo bonus. For example, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined when a bonus is won by bonus lottery during the general state, during CZ, during the first ART, and during the second ART. Further, it is determined when a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ.

  Further, the first ART is determined when the number of bonus winning games determined in advance by lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of games determined in advance by lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game (game) performed after the end of the first ART. When the bonus winning game number counter becomes “0”, the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined.

  When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if a bonus is won by bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game number counter becomes “0” or if a bonus winning is determined during CZ, a new bonus winning game number is determined by lottery. Is done.

  The first ART (pseudo bonus) is classified into three types: RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus). In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

  RB, BB, and SBB differ in the number of stay games (hereinafter referred to as “first ART start G (game) number”). In the present embodiment, the first ART start G number when the type of pseudo bonus is RB is determined to be “30”. Further, the first ART start G number in the case of BB is determined to be “60”, and the first ART start G number in the case of SBB is determined to be “100”.

  The “first ART start G number” determined according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in the first ART (pseudo bonus). The first ART (pseudo bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes “0”.

  The first ART is started after the game of the number of the first ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested and the game in preparation is completed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the first ART (pseudo bonus) has been won. If the player wins the first ART and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the BB preparation is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game during the RB preparation is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game.

  In the game during the BB preparation in which the type of the pseudo bonus determined is BB, in order to display the combination stop of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”). The stop order is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 55) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” described above (the combination of symbols reminiscent of BB) is stopped. The stop order for display is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is BB is started.

  In the game during the BB preparation in which the determined type of the pseudo bonus is SBB, in order to display the combination stop of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”). The stop order is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 55) is “18”, the stop order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB) is notified. Is done. Then, when the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is SBB is started.

  In the RB preparation game, the stop order for displaying the combination stop of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”) is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 55) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS * 2” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for notification is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_BNS * 2” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is RB is started.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT4 gaming state. For example, the second ART is executed by an ART lottery during the BB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) that is started by winning other than during the second ART (hereinafter referred to as “BB during non-ART”). Determined if ART wins. When winning of the second ART is determined, “50” is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART (hereinafter, “second ART start G (game) number”).

  “50” which is the “second ART start G number” is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in the second ART. The second ART ends when the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0”.

  The second ART is started after a game of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested and an ART preparation game is passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the second ART has been won. If the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

In the ART preparing game, the stop order for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to “C_small V” described above is notified. When the combination of symbols related to “C_small V” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

  In the second ART, for each game, a number-of-games extra lottery table (not shown) is referred to, and the number of extra games is lottery (an extra game number lottery), and the determined number of extra games is added to the ART game number counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART advantageous to the player can be continued for a long time.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (Battle Rush) is a sub gaming state related to an effect in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is expected, and is executed during the second ART. Whether or not to execute this BR is determined for each game during BB (hereinafter referred to as “BB during ART”) in the first ART (pseudo bonus) started by winning during the second ART. To be done. Further, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period of executing BR.

  In BR, BR continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is determined, an extra G (game) number lottery for lottering the addition (addition) number of ART games is determined. Do. The number of extra games determined by the extra G number lottery is notified in the last game (tenth game) of the predetermined number of games. The determined number of added games is added to the ART game number counter.

  Further, if the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) satisfies a specific number (in this embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3...)), The additional G number. A separate lottery G (game) number lottery is performed separately from the lottery.

  As the additional extra G number lottery of the present embodiment, five types of “additional extra A”, “additional extra B”, “additional extra C1”, “additional extra C2” and “additional extra C3” are provided. When the additional extra G number lottery is performed, the type of additional extra G number lottery is determined by the additional extra lottery during BR, and the additional game number is determined by the determined additional extra G number lottery.

  The determination and notification of the number of additional games by the additional additional G number lottery is performed by a game of a special number of games (in this embodiment, “2”) that is performed after a predetermined number of games have been completed. Further, the additional game number determined by the additional additional G number lottery is added to the additional game number counter. When a game with a special number of games is completed, a game with a predetermined number of games is started. If BR continuation is determined, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game with the predetermined number of games. The

  In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity to add the next number of ART games after a predetermined number of games. Thereby, the interest regarding the determination of the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest of the game can be improved for a long time.

  In addition, in a game with a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the addition of the number of ART games to continue. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, the result of the continuous lottery can be suggested in the game of the predetermined number of games. That is, the result of the continuous lottery can be suggested using a continuous performance performed over a plurality of games. Thereby, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined is equal to or greater than the specified number (“20” in the present embodiment), the first ART (pseudo bonus) is won as a bonus, and BR (battle) The start of rush is determined. Thereby, the feeling of expectation other than grant of the number of additional games can be included in the result of the continuous lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times that continuation is determined satisfies a specific number (in this embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3,...)), An additional G number lottery is added. Another additional extra G number lottery is performed. As a result, if the continuation continues, the value of the added game number may increase, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Configuration of data table stored in sub-ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 72 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, a CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning content of CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 57, when performing CZ lottery with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be “no winning”. For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “No winning” is obtained with a probability of 32718/32768, and “CZ2 winning” is obtained with a probability of 50/32768.

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the CZ medium cut-in addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ cut-in addition lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is CZ. This CZ cut-in addition lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence / absence of the specified number of additions and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the cut-in addition lottery using the CZ medium cut-in addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “1 addition to the specified number of times” is always determined, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). In this case, “add 1 to the specified number” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When “add 1 to the specified number of times” is determined, “1” is added to the value of the cut-in number counter in CZ. As a result, the number of times of “navigating to the black BAR” in CZ is increased by one.

[CZ cut-in lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table will be described. The CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table is referred to when the sub game state is CZ. This CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table shows lottery values set in accordance with the presence or absence of loss cut-in when the result of the internal lottery is “losing”.

  In the cut-in generation lottery using the CZ cut-in generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is “lost”, “loss cut-in occurrence” is determined with a probability of 10,000 / 32768. The loss cut-in is “navigating to the black BAR” performed when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not won. In “Navigating for black BAR”, it is recommended to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”), and the stop order (right middle left) in that case To do. When the lose cut-in is executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed.
In addition, even when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is won, “navigation for black BAR” is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is in the general state and in the second ART. This bonus lottery table indicates the correspondence between the presence / absence of a bonus and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “bonus winning” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). If it is, “bonus winning” is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When “bonus winning” is determined, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started through the first ART precursor game and the game under preparation corresponding to various bonuses.

  The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is a low probability bonus lottery table in which the probability of determining “bonus winning” is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a high-probability bonus lottery table having a higher probability of determining “bonus winning” than the low-probability bonus lottery table is provided. In the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes to be described later.

[G lottery table on G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the lottery table with the G number in BB added will be described. The lottery table with the G number added in BB is referred to when the BB in the first ART is in progress. This G number extra lottery table in BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the extra and lottery values set according to the winning number.

  In the G number addition lottery using the G number addition lottery table in the BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) The lottery value is sequentially subtracted according to the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “20G” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). In some cases, “10G” is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the number of G (game) such as “10G” and “20G” is determined, the determined number of G is added to the BB medium / high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the BB ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART lottery table during BB shown in FIG. 62 is referred to when the BB during non-ART is in a high probability state described later. This BB ART lottery table shows the second in the case where the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). The lottery value set in accordance with the presence / absence of ART winning is shown.

  In the ART lottery using the BB ART lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the BB in non-ART is in a high probability state and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, “ART winning” is always determined. This “ART winning” means that the winning of the second ART is determined. When “ART winning” is determined, the second ART is started through the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BB BR lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The BR lottery table during BB is referred to when the BB during ART is in a high probability state. The BR lottery table in BB shows the BR winning when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). The lottery value set according to the presence or absence of.

  In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the BB in ART is in a high probability state and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, “Battle Rush (BR) 1” with a probability of 16384/32768 “Winner” is determined, and “Battle Rush (BR) 2 Winner” is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. “BR2” has a higher probability of winning “BR continuation” in continuous lottery than “BR1”. The determined “BR1” or “BR2” is started after the end of the first ART (pseudo bonus).

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 64 is referred to when BR1 is in progress. The BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 65 is referred to when BR2 is in progress. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table indicate lottery values set in accordance with the presence or absence of BR continuation.

  In the BR lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a lottery result. Subtract one by one with the lottery value specified according to Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. As shown in FIG. 65, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the additional addition lottery table during BR will be described. The additional extra lottery table during BR is referred to when BR is in progress. This additional extra lottery table during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the extra and lottery values set according to the number of BRs to be continued.

  In the additional extra lottery using the BR extra extra lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the BR continuation number is “5” (BR5th station), “additional addition A” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and “additional addition B” is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. . Further, “additional addition C1” is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, “additional addition C2” is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and “additional addition C3” is determined with a probability of 450/32768.

[Additional extra during BR and promotion lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, an additional addition during BR and a promotion lottery table will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR is referred to when BR is in progress. This additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the BR additional addition and promotion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment), The lottery value is sequentially subtracted according to the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), 25768/32
“Additional addition C1” is determined with a probability of 768, and “Additional addition C2” is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. Further, “additional addition C3” is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. In addition, when it is already determined to perform additional extra lottery, whether or not to be promoted to a higher additional extra lottery is performed using the additional extra and promoted lottery table during BR.

  It should be noted that the upper additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of added games to be determined is larger than the additional additional lottery that is lower than that. In this embodiment, “additional addition B” is higher than “additional addition A”, and “additional addition C1”, “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” are higher than “additional addition B”. Further, “additional addition C2” is higher than “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” is higher than “additional addition C2”.

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional addition A addition G number lottery table is referred to when the addition G number lottery related to “addition addition A” is performed in BR. This additional addition A addition G number lottery table shows the addition G number and the lottery value set according to the addition G number.

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra A extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the extra G number lottery using the additional extra A extra G number lottery table, “10” is determined as the “additional game number” with the probability of 12568/32768, and “additional game number” with the probability of 13000/32768. “20” is determined. Further, “100” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768, and “200” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of “number of added games” is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional extra B extra G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional addition B addition G number lottery table is referred to when the addition G number lottery related to “addition addition B” is performed in BR. This additional extra B extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

The additional G number lottery using the additional extra B extra G number lottery table is performed each time a stop operation is detected. The column “1on” shown in FIG. 69 is referred to when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed. The column “2on_previous + 10” is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. The The column “3on_previous + 10” is referred to when the third stop operation (the third stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. The

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra B extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of “1 on”, “20” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after “20” is determined as the “number of added games” in the first stop operation, the column “2on_previous + 20” is referred to in the extra G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of “2on_before + 20”, “30” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after “30” is determined as the “number of added games” in the second stop operation, the column “3on_previous + 30” is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of “3on_previous + 30”, “50” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of “100” is acquired as the “number of added games”, and “100” is displayed in the ART game number counter. Is added.

  Referring to the column “2on_previous + 20” in FIG. 69, “0” and “10” are not determined as the number of additional games. Also, referring to the column “2on_previous + 30” in FIG. 69, “0”, “10”, and “20” are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column “3on_previous + 50”, “0”, “10”, “20”, and “30” are not determined as the number of additional games.

  As described above, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is greater than or equal to the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation. The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional extra C extra G number lottery table is referred to when the extra G number lottery related to “addition extra C1”, “addition extra C2” or “addition extra C3” is performed in BR. This additional extra C extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery values set according to the types of additional extra C (C1 to C3).

  The extra G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table is performed every time the press of the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and is ended when “0” is determined as the “additional game number” (“ No continuation ”).

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of “additional extra C1”, “0” is determined as the “number of extra games” with a probability of 8918/32768. In the case of “additional extra C2”, “0” is determined as the “number of extra games” with a probability of 4918/32768. In the case of “additional addition C3”, “0” is determined as the “number of additional games” with a probability of 2918/32768.

  Therefore, the “additional extra C2” has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the “additional additional C1”, and the “additional additional C3” has a higher probability of continuing the additional G number lottery than the “additional additional C2”. high.

  In addition, when an additional G number lottery using the additional G number lottery table is started, if the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started, the additional extra C amount G is automatically added. An extra G number lottery is performed using a number lottery table. Then, when “0” is determined as the “number of added games” in the automatically added G number lottery performed automatically, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. In addition, the automatic addition G number lottery may be provided with an upper limit value (for example, “1000”) of the value of the “number of addition games” to be determined.

  Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table, the start lever 16 is operated in a state where “other than“ 0 ”is determined as“ additional game number ”and“ continue ”is determined. There is a case. In this case, the “addition number of games” determined so far is validated, and the additional G number lottery using the additional addition C addition G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the “addition game number” determined in the automatically added G number lottery is added to the “addition game number” that has been determined before the automatic addition G number lottery is performed. “Additional number of games” obtained by the extra G number lottery using the C extra G number lottery table.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operating condition table will be described with reference to FIG. The operating condition table is referred to during each preparation. This operation condition table shows the types being prepared and the operation (end) conditions set according to the types being prepared.

  For example, when the winning number “18” (abbreviation “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won during the SBB preparation, the SBB preparation is ended, and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started. In addition, when the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during the BB preparation, the BB preparation is finished and the first ART is finished (first ART). BB in (bonus) is started.

  If the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during the RB preparation, the RB preparation is finished and the first bonus (pseudo) RB is started. In addition, during the ART preparation, the winning numbers “18” to “24” (abbreviated names “F_W7_KP_RT4”, “F_KP_R4_R2_1”, “F_KP_R4_R2_2”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_R”, “F_K”) The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning combination (winning number) that is an ending condition under preparation is won, information (stop order navigation) for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even when the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination serving as the end condition during preparation is not stopped and displayed, the preparation is completed.

  Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state, and the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART is set as the sub gaming state. Is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo bonus) and the second ART in the sub gaming state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

<Configuration of storage area provided in sub-RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 73 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, although explanation is omitted (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering production contents and production numbers and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6) are stored. Storage area and the like.

  The sub storage area has “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, and “RB2 flag”.

  The “CZ1 flag” is a flag indicating that CZ1 is in progress. If it is in CZ1, “1” is stored in the “CZ1 flag”. The “CZ2 flag” is a flag indicating that CZ2 is in progress. If it is in CZ2, “1” is stored in the “CZ2 flag”.

The “SBB flag” is a flag indicating that the SBB is in the first ART (pseudo bonus), and “1” is stored in the “SBB flag” when the SBB is in progress. The “BB flag” is a flag indicating that the BB is in the first ART. When the BB is in progress, “1” is stored in the “BB flag”. The “RB flag” is a flag indicating that the RB is in the first ART. When the RB is in the RB, “1” is stored in the “RB flag”.
That is, when the first ART is being performed, “1” is stored in any of the “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag”.

  The “ART flag” is a flag indicating that the second ART is being performed. When the second ART is being performed, “1” is stored in the “ART flag”.

  The “BR1 flag” is a flag indicating that BR1 is in progress, and when it is in BR1, “1” is stored in the “BR1 flag”. The “RB2 flag” is a flag indicating that BR2 is in progress. When the flag is in BR2, “1” is stored in the “BR2 flag”. As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set is repeated (loops) as long as “BR continuation” continues to be won by continuous lottery.

  The sub storage area includes an “additional addition A flag”, “additional addition B flag”, “additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, and “additional addition C3 flag”.

  The “additional addition A flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition A is in progress. When the addition addition A is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional addition A flag”. The “additional additional B flag” is a flag indicating that the additional addition B is in progress. When the additional addition B is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional additional B flag”.

  The “additional addition C1 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C1 is in progress, and “1” is stored in the “additional addition C1 flag” when the addition addition C1 is in progress. The “additional addition C2 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C2 is in progress, and “1” is stored in the “additional addition C2 flag” when the addition addition C2 is in progress. The “additional addition C3 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C3 is in progress. When the addition addition C3 is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional addition C3 flag”. Note that “1” is stored in the “additional additional C3 flag” even after the additional addition C3 is determined and started.

  “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag 2”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, “BR2 flag”, “additional additional A flag”, “addition” The “additional B flag”, “additional additional C1 flag”, “additional additional C2 flag”, and “additional additional C3 flag” actually start after execution of the corresponding production (transition to the corresponding state) is determined. “1” is stored in the period up to.

  Further, the sub storage area has a “CZ1 precursor flag”, “CZ2 precursor flag”, “BB precursor flag”, “RB precursor flag”, “ART precursor flag”, and “BR precursor flag”.

  The “CZ1 precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a CZ1 precursor is present. When the CZ1 precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “CZ1 precursor flag”. The “CZ2 precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a CZ2 precursor is present. When the CZ2 precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “CZ2 precursor flag”.

  The “BB precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a BB (SBB) precursor is present. When the BB (SBB) precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “BB precursor flag”. The “RB precursor flag” is a flag indicating that an RB precursor is present. If the RB precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “RB precursor flag”.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined whether to select “SBB”, “BB”, or “RB”. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined only whether or not “RB” is set, and when it is determined not to be set to “RB”, at the end of the BB precursor, It may be determined whether to select “SB” or “BB”.

  The “ART precursor flag” is a flag indicating that an ART (second ART) precursor is present. When the ART precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “ART precursor flag”. Further, the “BR precursor flag” is a flag indicating that a BR precursor is present. When the BR precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the “BR precursor flag”.

  The sub-storage area has an “SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag”, “RB preparing flag”, and “ART preparing flag”.

  The “SBB preparing flag” is a flag indicating that the SBB is being prepared. When the SBB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “SBB preparing flag”. The “BB preparing flag” is a flag indicating that the BB is being prepared. When the BB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “SBB preparing flag”.

  The “RB preparation flag” is a flag indicating that the RB is being prepared. When the RB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “RB preparation flag”. The “ART ready flag” is a flag indicating that the ART is being prepared. When the ART is being prepared, “1” is stored in the “ART ready flag”.

In the present embodiment, “under preparation” conceptually indicates a section in which a predetermined state is determined to start but cannot be started because the start condition is not satisfied. During preparation, it is similar to a warning sign, but unlike a warning sign, it actively encourages the start condition to be met.
For example, when the generation of ART is determined, in order to start the ART, it is necessary to simultaneously generate AT and RT. The AT can be started immediately by the sub control board 42 (see FIG. 7), but the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6). However, since communication from the sub-control board 42 to the main control circuit 91 is not possible, generally, “AT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91” is performed indirectly. Encourage the start of RT. That is, in general, a difference between the AT start timing by the sub control board 42 and the RT start timing by the main control circuit 91 is a section referred to as being prepared.

Then, if the determination of the ART end condition is started in accordance with the start of the AT, the ART period is included in the ART period. Therefore, in some cases, the ART period ends without generating an ART. There is a fear. Such a game machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design development difficult because the ART period assumed at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual ART period. It becomes a factor.
Therefore, although the AT is performed until the condition of the RT (main control circuit 91 side) is satisfied, the period for not including the ART period is provided by not determining the ART end condition. Since this section is a section in which ART is being prepared, this section is referred to as being prepared.

  In addition, the sub storage area includes “CZ game number counter”, “pseudo bonus game number counter”, “ART game number counter”, “BR game number counter”, “additional additional game number counter”, and “additional game number counter”. "have.

  The “CZ game number counter” is incremented by “1” every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of the “CZ game number counter” is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. In the “pseudo-bonus game number counter”, the number of games (“30” or “60” or “100”) set according to the types of various pseudo-bonuses is set before the pseudo-bonus is started. .

  Then, “1” is subtracted every time a game is played in the first ART (pseudo bonus). Note that when the “BB medium / high probability counter” described later has a value, the subtraction of the “pseudo bonus medium game number counter” is stopped.

  “50” is set in the “ART game number counter” before the second ART is started. The “ART game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in the second ART. In the “BR game number counter”, “10” is set before BR1 or BR2 is started. The “BR game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

  “2” is set in the “additional added game number counter” before the game related to the additional addition effect is started. The “additional additional game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game related to the additional addition effect is performed.

  The “additional game number counter” is provided for temporary storage until the total number of additional games is determined when additional addition is performed. Therefore, each time the additional game number is determined in the additional addition, the determined additional game number is added to the “additional game number counter”.

  The sub-storage area has a “CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ”, a “BB medium / high probability counter”, a “predictor game number counter”, and a “preparing digested G number counter”.

  In the “CI counter in CZ”, “4” is set before CZ1 is started, and “10” is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the “CI counter in CZ” is decremented by “1” every time “navigating to the black BAR” (cut-in effect) occurs.

  In the “BB medium / high probability counter”, when the additional G number related to the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined by the extra number of G numbers in the BB, the determined additional G number is added. When the “BB medium / high probability counter” has a value, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is in a high probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

  In the “predictor game number counter”, the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the “predictor game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game for each precursor is performed. The “preparing digested G number counter” is incremented by “1” each time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of the “preparing digested G number counter” is cleared when each preparation is completed.

  Further, the sub storage area includes a “BR continuation flag”, a “BR one-time continuation storage area”, and “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

  The “BR continuation flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started. When it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, the “BR continuation flag” is set to “BR continuation flag”. “1” is stored.

  The “BR next-time continuous storage area” is a storage area indicating whether BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set, “1” is stored in the “BR subsequent storage area”.

  In the present embodiment, special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another. In addition, when it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a dedicated effect for informing whether or not the special BR is “continuation” is performed.

  “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” are flags indicating whether execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined. When execution of BR1 is determined, “1” is stored in any one of “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”. If execution of BR2 is determined, “2” is stored in any one of “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of main operation processing of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a main flowchart shown in FIG. 73 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when power is turned on to the pachi-slot 1, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of power-on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, input checks of the medal sensor 46S and the start switch 16S are performed. Details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts random values (0 to 65535), and stores the extracted random values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random number value used in the reel effect and lock control in the “continuous lock state”, and uses the extracted effect random number value in the effect random value storage area (not stored) provided in the main RAM 95. (S5). In the present embodiment, an effect random number value 1, an effect random number value 2, and an effect random number value 3 are provided as effect random number values. These production random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, respectively.

  When the extracted various random number values are stored in a predetermined random value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value extracted in S4. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control board 42. Note that the start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, the reel effect and lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of reel effect and lock performed in the “continuous lock state” determined in the process of S8 are mainly performed. The details of the game start lock process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the driving of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 94), which will be described later, executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a drawing priority order storing process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. Details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. Details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 52) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 48). In this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 22), Is matched. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the hopper 43 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 22), the number of inserted medals is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout. The number of sheets (payout upper limit) is 14 sheets.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT gaming state. Details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout end command transmission processing (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 42.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game with reference to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game. Details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to re-playing has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is an automatic loading request (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs automatic loading processing (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the medal inserted from the medal slot 13 is accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper 43.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) game state, the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “1”, and in the other game states (BB1, BB2 game state and general game state), the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “3”. To "".

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control board 42 (S37). The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout port 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described. In the present embodiment, internal lottery processing using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing internal lottery processing (internal winning combination determining means).

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 49), and determines the type and number of lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 25). decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery value change processing (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. Details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a random number value stored in the random value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

  In S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S47). In S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 According to the winning number, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S49).

  After the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 32 to 35) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S51).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” in S52 (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the bonus internal winning combination determination table ( Referring to FIG. 31), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S54).

  After the process of S54, or when S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S55).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). In S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the CB gaming state (when S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 73). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S56 that the main CPU 93 is in the CB gaming state (when S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area ( S57). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 75) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 49) to determine whether or not the RT gaming state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in any of the bits 0 to 4 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 49). In S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state flag is not on (in the case where S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 75). ) To S43.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is on (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines that the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state that is on. Referring to Fig. 26, the lottery value of the winning number ("1" to "24") related to replaying in the internal gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 26) is changed (S62). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and moves the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 75).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the RT4 gaming state (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 73). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S71 that the main CPU 93 is in the RT4 gaming state (in the case where S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 46) and sets the effect random number value to 1. Based on this, game lock lottery is performed (S72).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock is won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). When the main CPU 93 determines in S73 that the game lock has not been won (when S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process proceeds to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 73). Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the main CPU 93 has won the game lock (when S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets a game lock flag and a lock timer. Then, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotating cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 36), and acquires the rotating cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). . Specifically, the main CPU 93, corresponding to the acquired spinning cylinder stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push Time table change initial data and irregular pressing time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 52) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 73). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock process at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S112 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( Move to S11 of FIG.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the drawing priority order storing process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as a search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (the small combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the symbol position data and sets “21” as the symbol check count (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 48) based on the acquired symbol code and data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 52) (S126). At this time, regardless of whether or not an internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 19 to 22) may be acquired by collating. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 draws in priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 48) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to the ranking table (see FIG. 44), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In addition, when symbols of a combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 22) related to a combination (for example, “cherry”) in which a winning is confirmed in some reels are displayed For the reel that is “ANY”, the pull-in priority data of the combination is not acquired. Further, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won is confirmed in the reel for which winning is confirmed, the drawing priority data is set to “stop prohibited (all bits 0)”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (see FIG. 53) (S128). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S129).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). In S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches has been searched (S131).

  In S131, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of times of search (when S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process and the process is S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 73). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of the pull-in priority table selection process performed in S123 in the pull-in priority storage process flowchart (see FIG. 80).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a pull-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not a pull-in priority table number is stored directly in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is set (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority table selection process and stores the pull-in priority order. The process proceeds to S124 of the process (see FIG. 80).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set in S141 (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 51) and the operation stop button. With reference to the area (see FIG. 50), the corresponding drawing priority table number is set (S142). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority order table selecting process, and moves the process to S124 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 80).

  In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the symbol code acquisition processing performed in S125 in the flowchart (see FIG. 80) of the drawing priority order storage processing will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In this embodiment, the effective line (winning determination line) is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets check symbol position data for the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S153). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storing process, and moves the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 80).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described. In the present embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing reel stop control processing (stop control means).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (when S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161, and a valid stop button pressing operation is executed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 51) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 51). 50) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the stop button non-operating counter by 1 (S163).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control board 42 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch. Note that the ON / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control board 42.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position determined in S168 as a search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 82 (S170). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 52) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (when S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S173 that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S173), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control board 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 80 (S176). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is “0” in S175 (when S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 73). (Refer to S15).

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on a line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “10000000” in which bit 7 corresponding to “left reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. Select. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00010000” in which “1” is set in bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data as the line mask data. To do. For example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00000010” in which bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). In S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the first stop (when S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S182 that the main CPU 93 is the first stop (when S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is a left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 obtains the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the forward-pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 37 and 38). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the first press stop table corresponding to the forward press table selection data, and acquires the sliding piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 obtains the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table selection. An irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S189). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set table for stopping irregular pressing, and acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the drawing priority order data corresponding to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” is compared, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and moves the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart (see FIG. 84) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the main CPU 93 is at the time of the second stop operation (when S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 presses the stop buttons in order (first reel is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is a forward press (when S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S203). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S204). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding frame number search process (S205). In this process, with reference to the stop table (FIGS. 39, 41, and 42), the slip piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 93 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not the corresponding data is “1” for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the number of sliding pieces determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 84).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 86, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart (see FIG. 84) of the number of sliding pieces determination process and in S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 85). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in this embodiment, when the change status is “1”, the A line status is set, and when the change status is “2”, the B line status is set. After the process of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is S189 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 84) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 85). ) In S204.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is not “1” or “2” (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to the “middle reel line change bit” or “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 41 and 42), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is stored. It is determined whether or not “1”. When the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not on (when S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. , And the process proceeds to S189 in the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 84) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is ON (when S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 The line status is set (S214). The B line status is data used for changing the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 84) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 85). ) In S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 87, the line mask data to be executed in S189 in the flowchart (see FIG. 84) of the sliding piece number determining process and in S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 85). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). The setting of the C line status is performed in the case of forward pressing in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 90) described later.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set in S221 (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. A determination is made (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button (when S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data twice to the right (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is a middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop is a right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00000010” to “10000000” by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the “right reel C line data” of the stop table for second and third stops (see FIG. 41) at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the slip piece number determination processing (see FIG. 84) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 85). ) In S205.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00010000” to “01000000” by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the “middle reel C line data” of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 84) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 85). ) In S205.

  In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). . In S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is not set (in the case where S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data changing process, and the process is determined as the number of sliding frames (see FIG. 84) or the process of S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set in S225 (when S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 41 and 42) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 84) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 85). ) In S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 84) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 45) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, “5” is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of a stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of sliding frames to the expected stop start address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (in the case where S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 detects the slip acquired in S234. The number of frames is saved (S237).

  Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the number of checks by 1, and increments the search order counter by 1 (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S239 (when S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of sliding symbols that have been retreated (S240). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 84).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and the process is S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is not after the third stop (when S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). When the main CPU 93 determines in S252 that it is after the second stop (when S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a control process after the second stop (S253). Details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Then, after the process of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S252 that the main CPU 93 is not after the second stop (when S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S254 that the main CPU 93 is the forward push (when S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 40). And the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a planned stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position does not match the scheduled stop position (when S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is “0” in S259 (when S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the second- Obtained as the third stop table number and set the corresponding stop table (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). After the process of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83).

  In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position coincides with the scheduled stop position (when S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the second pressing operation according to the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S262).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S263). After the process of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 83).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 89) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S271). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press in S271 (when S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 89). To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is a forward press (when S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not. Is determined (S272). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 89). In S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not ON (in the case where S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and the control change process (FIG. 89) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on in S272 (when S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not ON (when S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 89) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (in the case where S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the stored forward pressing. “1” is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). After the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the second post-stop control change process and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 89).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 24) and checks RT game state transition conditions that can be established in the transition source (current) RT game state (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state transition condition is not satisfied (when S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S282 that the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (when S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 24) and transitions. Based on the condition, the RT game state flag of the transfer destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 49), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control board 42. The display command includes parameters that specify a display combination, a payout number, and the like. Then, after the process of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control process and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is in operation with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 49) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not operating (when S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 73). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is in operation in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. Is discriminated (S322).

  In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs bonus end time processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the active “MB”. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 13 during the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control board 42. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S325). After the process of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” in S322 (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning number counter and the possible game number counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not “0” (when S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. The process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S327 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs processing at the end of the CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to “CB” and clearing the values of the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not in operation (S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is operating in S331 (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether “CB” is operating (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is in operation (in the case where S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 73). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is not in operation in S332 (when S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 23). (S333). After the process of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

  When S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is winning (S334). In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” is displayed as a bonus game winning. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a winning game (when S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S338 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S334 that the bonus game is winning (when S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 23). A corresponding bonus activation process is performed (S335). In this embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 23), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 49), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operation process described in S333 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control board 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. After S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

  When S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to replaying (replay) is a winning (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role related to replay is not winning (when S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 73). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to replaying is a win (when S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 73).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 73) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch on the stop switch board 65 are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S344). In this processing, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control board 42 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S345, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S347). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control board>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 108.

  In the present embodiment, the contents of the lottery process performed by the sub control board 42 in the following various processes are as follows (1) to (3). (1) First, when performing lottery processing, the sub-control board 42 transmits command data of a “lottery request” requesting execution of proxy lottery processing to each sub device (see FIGS. 13 to 15). (2) Next, the sub control board 42 receives the command data of “lottery result notification” from each sub device, and acquires the result of the proxy lottery process (see FIGS. 13 to 15). (3) Then, the sub control board 42 employs one result as a lottery result from the obtained results of the plurality of proxy lottery processes. In addition, as a method for determining one result to be adopted from the results of a plurality of proxy lottery processes, for example, a lottery using random numbers can be cited.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 71 checks reception of a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when receiving the command, the sub CPU 71 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S503). In S503, when the sub CPU 71 determines that a command different from the previous command has not been received (when S503 is NO), the sub CPU 71 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S503 that the sub CPU 71 has received a command different from the previous one (when S503 is YES), the sub CPU 71 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 71 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 71 extracts a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S512 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs processing of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a message in the message queue in S512 (when S512 is YES), the sub CPU 71 copies game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel that has stopped rotating, a display combination, and a game state flag specified by parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 73. The

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs effect content determination processing (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the contents of the production, registers the production data, etc. according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 registers animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 71 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 71 registers lamp data (S517). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process in S514. After S517, the sub CPU 71 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a start command is received (S521).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S521 that the start command is being received (when S521 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a start command receiving process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 71 extracts the effect random number, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers it. Here, the production number is data for designating the content of the production to be executed this time. Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 registers start effect data in accordance with the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data that designates animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as display of video are executed. Then, after the process of S523, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines in S521 that the start command is not received (when S521 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the reel stop command is received (S524).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S524 that the reel stop command is being received (when S524 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S525). In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery when the additional addition B flag is on.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 registers the production data at the time of stop according to the registered production number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the reel stop command is not received in S524 (when S524 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a display command reception (S527).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the display command is received in S527 (when S527 is YES), the sub CPU 71 registers the display effect data according to the registered effect number and display combination. (S528). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when it is determined at S527 that the display command is not received (when S527 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S529). In S529, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is a payout end command reception time (when S529 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a payout end command reception time process (S530). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines in S529 that the payout end command is not received (when S529 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a bonus start command reception (S531).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S531 that the bonus start command is being received (S531 is YES), the sub CPU 71 registers bonus start effect data (S532). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S531 that the sub CPU 71 is not receiving a bonus start command (when S531 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a bonus end command reception (S533). When the sub CPU 71 determines in S533 that the bonus end command is being received (S533 is YES), the sub CPU 71 registers bonus end effect data (S534). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the bonus end command is not received in S533 (when S533 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a no-operation command reception (S535). In S535, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not a no-operation command reception (when S535 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and the process of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96). Move to S515.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S535 that the sub CPU 71 is receiving no operation command (when S535 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs processing when no operation command is received (S536). The details of the non-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S536, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 96).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the start command reception process performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception process described below is executed by the sub-control board 42.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is being performed (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

  In S541, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pseudo bonus is being performed (when S 541 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a pseudo bonus process (S542). The details of the pseudo bonus mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S541 that the sub CPU 71 is not in the pseudo bonus (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is in ART (second ART) (S543). . During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the ART (second ART) is being performed in S543 (in the case where S543 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs the ART processing (S544). Details of the ART processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S543 that the sub CPU 71 is not in the ART (second ART) (in the case where S543 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs normal middle processing (S545). Note that details of the normal middle processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of S542 and S545, the sub CPU 71 conducts preparatory processing (S546). Details of the preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a precursor check process (S547). Details of the warning check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 71 performs effect lottery processing (S548). In the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of “lottery request” including a command and parameters (information stored in the sub storage area) requesting the proxy lottery process of the effect lottery process to each sub device. To do. Next, the sub CPU 71 acquires the result of the proxy lottery process from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as a lottery result from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processes, and determines an effect number. Then, the determined production number is stored in the sub storage area. An effect number lottery table (not shown) necessary for the proxy lottery process of the effect lottery process is stored in the RAM of the one-chip CPU of each sub device by the loading process (FIGS. 12 to 15) in each sub device. .
After the process of S548, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the process to S523 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the process during pseudo bonus performed in S542 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus preparation flag is on (S561). The pseudo bonus preparing flag includes an SBB preparing flag, a BB preparing flag, and an RB preparing flag. Accordingly, in S561, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

  In S561, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pseudo bonus preparation flag is on (when S561 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparation flag is that the winning number “18” (abbreviated as “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won in the internal lottery process. The start conditions corresponding to the BB preparing flag and the RB preparing flag are the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) in the internal lottery process. It is to win.

  In S562, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag is satisfied (when S562 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a pseudo bonus start process (S563).

  In the process for starting the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 71 turns off the preparation flag corresponding to the started pseudo bonus and sets a value (“100” or “60” or “30”) corresponding to the started pseudo bonus to the pseudo bonus. Set to the bonus game number counter. In addition, the sub CPU 71 clears the preparation G digest counter. After the process of S563, the sub CPU 71 ends the pseudo bonus medium process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S562 that the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is not satisfied (when S562 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the pseudo bonus process and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the time process (see FIG. 98).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S561 that the pseudo bonus preparation flag is not on (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the BB flag is on (S564).

In S564, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BB flag is on (in the case where S564 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines that the G number in the BB is based on the lottery table on the G number in the BB (see FIG. 61). An extra lottery process is performed (S565). In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data for “lottery request” including a command requesting the proxy lottery process for the lottery process and the winning number to the sub-device. Next, the sub CPU 71 acquires the result of the proxy lottery process (any one of “no extra”, “10G”, “20G”, and “30G”) from each subdevice. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.
In this BB medium G number lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 71 adds the determined value to the BB medium high probability counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs the ART lottery processing during BB based on the ART lottery table during BB (see FIG. 62), or BR lottery during BB based on the BR (battle rush) lottery table during BB (see FIG. 63). Processing is performed (S566).

Specifically, it is a non-ART BB, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”) is internal winning by internal lottery processing. When it is determined as a winning combination, an ART lottery process during BB is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of “lottery request” including a command for requesting the proxy lottery process of the ART lottery process during BB to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 acquires the result of proxy lottery processing (“ART winning” in the present embodiment) from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.
Also, a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”), which is a BB in ART, is determined as an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. In the case, BR lottery processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of “lottery request” including a command for requesting a proxy lottery process of the BR lottery process to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 acquires the result of the proxy lottery process (any one of “Battle Rush Non-Winning”, “Battle Rush 1 Win”, “Battle Rush 2 Win”) from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.

  In the BB ART lottery process, when “ART winning” is determined, the sub CPU 71 turns on the “ART flag” (stores “1” in the “ART flag”). In addition, in the BB BR lottery process, when “Battle Rush 1 Win” is determined, the sub CPU 71 stores “1” in the “BR stock storage area”. When “Battle Rush 2 Win” is determined, the sub CPU 71 stores “2” in the “BR stock storage area”.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the lottery result of S566 is a win (S567). That is, it is determined whether one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that it is a win in S567 (when S567 is YES), the sub CPU 71 sets “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” (S568). Note that “reverse pressing” in the present embodiment means that the stop order is “middle right” or “middle right”.

  The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number (data pointer for small combination / replay) “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”. In the present embodiment, when the winning number (small pointer / replay data pointer) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the stop order is “right left middle” or “right middle left”. As a result, the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed.

  When the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed, “white BAR” − “white BAR” − “along a straight line extending over the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is possible to stop and display the combination of symbols of “white BAR”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined, “reverse pushing navigation (navigating white BAR)” is performed.

  Stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”, and the combination of symbols of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is stopped and displayed along a straight line. Then, the player can recognize that one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, "ART winning" is determined, and if it is BB during ART, "battle rush 1 winning" or "battle rush 2 winning" is determined.

  Even if the data pointer (winning number) for the small role / replay is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, “Battle rush 2” If none of the “winning” is determined, “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is not performed. In other words, even if the combination of symbols of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” can be stopped, any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” Is not determined, “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is not performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as an internal winning combination, the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB is performed. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process, the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB may be performed.

  For example, if an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined and one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined, When the winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, “reverse push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed. That is, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is subsequently determined as an internal winning combination, regardless of the result of the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB, Navigation (Aiming at the white BAR) ”.

  In S567, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not a win (when S567 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a reverse reverse push lottery based on a reverse reverse lottery table (not shown) (S569). In the present embodiment, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the rasp reverse push lottery is performed. If “gase reverse pressing win” is determined, “reverse pressing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed.

  When the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the ART lottery process during BB and the BR lottery process during BB are not performed. Accordingly, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, any of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is not determined.

  When the small combination / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, “C_HOM_B” to “C_HOM_J” and “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” are determined as the internal winning combination ( (See FIGS. 32 and 33). When the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, it is changed to “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the stop order is “right / left / right” or “right / left / left” as in “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”. Even so, the combination of symbols “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that neither “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  When “C_HOM_B”, “C_HOM_E” to “C_HOM_G” are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, “white BAR” − “white BAR” until the second stop. "-" White BAR "symbol combination is a stop mode (so-called" Tempai ") that can stop display along a straight line. In the third stop, the symbol combination of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is not stopped and displayed.

  After the processing of S568 and S569, or when S564 is NO, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the RB flag is on (S570).

  In S570, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the RB flag is on (when S570 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs an RB ART lottery process based on an RB ART lottery table (not shown). Alternatively, the RB BR lottery process is performed based on the RB BR lottery table (not shown) (S571).

  Specifically, if the RB is in a non-ART and the data pointer (winning number) for the small role / replay is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the number of ART sets in the RB Perform lottery processing. On the other hand, if it is an RB in ART and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, a BR lottery process in RB is performed.

  After the processing of S571 or when S571 is NO, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the BB middle / high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the BB medium / high probability counter is 1 or more (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the BB medium / high probability counter (S573). .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines in S572 that the BB medium / high probability counter is not 1 or more (when S572 is NO), the sub CPU 71 decrements the value of the pseudo bonus medium game number counter by “1” ( S574).

  After the processes of S573 and S574, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the counter game number during pseudo bonus is 1 or more (when S 575 is YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the process during pseudo bonus and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the time process (see FIG. 98).

  In S575, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the counter number of games during pseudo bonus is not 1 or more (when S 575 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs pseudo bonus end time processing (S576).

In the process at the end of the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 71 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus that has ended. In addition, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 71 performs ART start processing. If the type of the pseudo bonus that has been completed is SBB, the sub CPU 71 turns on the ART flag and performs ART start processing. Further, when “1” or “2” is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 71 performs BR start processing.
After the process of S576, the sub CPU 71 ends the process during the pseudo bonus and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the processing during ART performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag refers to either the BR flag 1 or the BR flag 2.

  In S581, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when S581 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines that the bonus lottery is related to the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 60). Processing is performed (S582). In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits a command requesting a proxy lottery process of the bonus lottery process and “lottery request” command data including a winning number to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 obtains the result of proxy lottery processing (either “no winning” or “bonus winning”) from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.

  When “bonus winning” is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines the type of bonus (pseudo bonus) by performing the bonus distribution lottery process based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, a flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and a preparation flag (“SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag” or “RB preparation flag) )).

  After the process of S582, the sub CPU 71 performs an extra lottery process based on an extra lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by the additional lottery process, the sub CPU 71 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. Note that the BR lottery process may be performed separately from the extra lottery process.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the “preparing flag (ART preparing flag)” is ON (S584). In S584, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the preparation flag is on (in the case where S584 is YES), the sub CPU 71 terminates the ART processing, and starts the processing when the start command is received (see FIG. 98). To S546.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S584 that the preparation flag is not on (when S584 is NO), the sub CPU 71 decrements the value of the ART game number counter by “1” (S585). After the process of S585, the sub CPU 71 ends the ART process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S581, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when S581 is YES), the sub CPU 71 has a value of the additional additional game number counter of 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S586).

  In S586, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” or more (when S586 is YES), the sub CPU 71 subtracts the value of the additional added game number counter from “1”. (S587). Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” and the additional added A flag is on (S588).

  In S588, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” and the additional added A flag is on (when S588 is YES), the sub CPU 71 adds the additional added A value. Additional addition A addition G number lottery processing related to the G number lottery table (see FIG. 68) is performed (S589). In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of “lottery request” including a command for requesting a proxy lottery process for the additional extra A extra G number lottery process to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 determines the result of proxy lottery processing (“0”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, “200”, “300”) from each subdevice. Or get). And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing. Then, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additional games determined in the additional addition A addition G number lottery process to the ART game number counter. After the process of S589, the sub CPU 71 ends the process during the ART, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S588, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional additional game number counter is “1” and the additional additional A flag is not ON (when S 588 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is “0” (S590).

  In S590, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “0” (when S590 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the ART processing and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the process (see FIG. 98).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “0” in S590 (when S590 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional added C flag (“addition added C1 flag”, “ It is determined whether or not the “additional additional C2 flag” or “additional additional C3 flag”) is ON (S591).

  In S591, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional extra C flag is on (when S591 is YES), the sub CPU 71 adds the additional extra C related to the extra extra C extra G number lottery table (see FIG. 70). An extra G number lottery process is performed (S592). That is, the additional extra C extra G number lottery process of S592 is performed on the start lever 16 before the additional extra C extra G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (one bet button 15) is completed. It is executed when In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of a “lottery request” including a command for requesting a proxy lottery process of the additional extra C extra G number lottery process to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 sends the result of proxy lottery processing (“0”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “50”, “ 100 ”). And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 adds the added game number determined in the additional added C added G number lottery process to the added game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is “continuation” (S593). When “1” or more is determined as the additional game number by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing in S592, “continue” is determined, and “0” is determined as the additional game number by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing. If it is, “No continuation” is displayed.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that “continuation” is determined in S593 (in the case where S593 is YES), the sub CPU 71 returns the process to S592, and adds the additional game C addition G number lottery process in S592 as the additional game number. The processes of S592 and S593 are repeated until “0” is determined. It should be noted that even if the number of times of performing the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing reaches a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), “no continuation” is determined and the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is terminated. Good. In addition, when the number of additional addition C addition G number lottery processing reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is “continue”, the sub CPU 71 determines that “no continuation”, The additional addition C addition G number lottery processing may be terminated.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not “continuation” in S593 (in the case where S593 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs an additional extra C end process (S594). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 71 sets the corresponding additional addition flag ("addition addition A flag", "addition addition B flag", "addition addition C1 flag", "addition addition C2 flag", or "addition addition C3"). Flag ") off. Further, the sub CPU 71 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

  After the process of S594 or when S591 is NO, the sub CPU 71 performs a BR continuation process (S595). Details of the BR continuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S595, the sub CPU 71 ends the ART process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S586 that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” or more (when S586 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the BR continuation flag is “1” or more. Is determined (S596).

  In S596, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (in the case where S596 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs the additional addition and the additional addition relating to the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 67). Promotion lottery processing is performed (S597). In this process, the sub-CPU 71 transmits command data for “lottery request” including a command for requesting a proxy lottery process for additional addition and promotion lottery process and a winning number to each sub-device. Next, the sub CPU 71 obtains the result of proxy lottery processing from each sub device (“winning no”, “additional extra A”, “additional extra B”, “additional extra C1”, “additional extra C2”, “additional extra C3” ”). And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 adds an additional extra flag (“addition extra A flag”, “addition extra B flag”, “addition extra C1 flag”, “addition extra C2 flag” corresponding to the extra content determined in the additional extra and promotion lottery processing. Or “additional additional C3 flag”).

  Note that only one of the additional additional flags is turned on. In addition, even if the additional addition moves up, it does not move down. For example, if the added content determined this time is higher than the previously determined added content, the additional added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is turned off, and the additional added flag corresponding to the added content determined this time is turned on. . On the other hand, if the added content determined this time is lower than the previously determined added content, the additional added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is kept on.

  In S596, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR continuation flag is not “1” or more (when S596 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a BR continuous rewriting lottery process (S598).

  In the BR continuous rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery on whether or not to rewrite “non-continuous” of BR to “continuous” based on a BR continuous rewriting lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to rewrite “non-continuation” of BR to “continuation”, BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 102).

  After the processing of S597 and S598, the sub CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the BR game number counter (S599). Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is “1” or more (S600). In S600, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR game number counter is “1” or more (when S600 is YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the ART processing, and starts the process when the start command is received ( The process proceeds to S546 in FIG.

  In S600, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR game number counter is not “1” or more (when S600 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the BR continuation flag is “1” or more. (S601).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR continuation flag is not “1” or more (when S601 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a BR end time process (S602). In the BR end process, the sub CPU 71 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the flag that is turned off is the “BR2 flag”, or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, “20 or more”), the sub CPU 71 sets the “SBB flag” and the “SBB preparing flag”. And “BR1 flag” are turned on. After the process of S602, the sub CPU 71 ends the ART process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (when S601 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs an extra lottery process during BR continuation (S603). In the BR continuing addition process, the sub CPU 71 performs lottery related to the BR continuing addition lottery table (not shown), determines the number of added games, and adds the determined number of added games to the value of the ART game number counter. . Note that in the BR lottery adding lottery process according to the present embodiment, “0” is not determined as the number of additional games, and a predetermined number (eg, “10”) or more is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional extra flag is on (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 71 adds “2” to the value of the additional extra game number counter (S605). After the process of S605, the sub CPU 71 ends the ART process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S604, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional addition flag is not on (when S604 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs BR continuation processing (S606). After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 71 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 98).

[BR continuation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the BR continuation process performed in S595 and S606 in the flowchart of the ART process (see FIGS. 100 and 101) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 71 adds “10” to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the BR successive continuation flag is “1” (S623).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the BR continuation flag is “1” (when S623 is YES), the sub CPU 71 turns on the BR continuation flag and stores “ 2 ”is set (stored) (S624).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the BR successive continuation flag is not “1” (when S623 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs BR continuous lottery processing (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 64) or the BR2 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 65). In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of “lottery request” including a command for requesting the proxy lottery process of the BR continuous lottery process to each sub device. The sub CPU 71 requests a proxy lottery process of the BR continuous lottery process related to the BR1 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 64) when the BR1 is in progress, and BR2 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 65) when the BR2 is in the middle. The proxy lottery process of the BR continuous lottery process related to is requested. Next, the sub CPU 71 acquires a result of proxy lottery processing (either “BR non-continuation” or “BR continuation”) from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to continue BR in S625 is determined (S626). In S626, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not determined to continue BR (when S626 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the BR continuation processing and also performs the ART processing (FIG. 100 and FIG. 100). 101) also ends.

  After the process of S624, or when S626 is YES, the sub CPU 71 performs a BR continuation determination process (S627). Details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S627, the sub CPU 71 ends the BR continuation processing and also ends the ART processing (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

[BR continuation decision processing]
Next, the BR continuation determination time process performed in S627 in the BR continuation time process flowchart (see FIG. 102) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 71 performs an additional addition lottery process during BR according to the additional addition lottery table during BR (see FIG. 66) (S641). In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a command for requesting the proxy lottery process for the additional addition lottery process during BR and parameters corresponding to the proxy lottery process for requesting execution of the “BR5th station”, “BR10th station”, “BR15th station”. The command data of “lottery request” including data indicating “Eye”, “BR20th Station”, and “Every 5 stations after the 25th Station” is transmitted to each sub-device. Next, the sub CPU 71 obtains the result of proxy lottery processing from each sub device (“winning no”, “additional extra A”, “additional extra B”, “additional extra C1”, “additional extra C2”, “additional extra C3” ”). And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as a lottery result from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processes, and determines the additional addition content. Then, an additional addition flag (“addition addition A flag”, “addition addition B flag”, “addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag”, or “addition addition C3 flag”) corresponding to the determined additional addition contents is displayed. Turn on.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a BR lottery continuous lottery process (S643). In the BB successive round lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to continue the BR successive rounds based on a BR successive round lottery table (not shown). If it is decided to “continue” the next BR, the “1” is stored in the BR continuous storage area. If the value of the BR successive storage area is “2”, the BR consecutive lottery process is not performed. After the process of S643, the sub CPU 71 ends the BR continuation determination process and also ends the BR continuation process (see FIG. 102).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the normal medium process performed in S545 in the flowchart (see FIG. 98) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not CZ is in progress (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on, and the CZ precursor flag is off. In S661, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the CZ is not in progress (when S661 is NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of modes having different CZ winning rates and bonus (pseudo bonus) winning rates in the general state are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines a mode based on a mode lottery table (not shown), and shifts to the determined mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs CZ entry lottery processing related to the CZ entry lottery table (see FIG. 57) (S663). In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits a command requesting proxy lottery processing for CZ entry lottery and “lottery request” command data including a winning number to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 obtains the result of the proxy lottery process (any one of “no winning”, “CZ1 winning”, “CZ2 winning”) from each sub device. Then, the sub CPU 71 adopts one result as a lottery result from the obtained results of the plurality of proxy lottery processes, and determines whether or not CZ is won. When the CZ winning is determined, the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on a precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined number of precursor games is stored in the precursor game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 60) (S664). In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits a command requesting a proxy lottery process of the bonus lottery process and “lottery request” command data including a winning number to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU obtains the result of proxy lottery processing (either “winning no” or “bonus winning”) from each sub device. Then, the sub CPU adopts one result as the lottery result from the obtained results of the plurality of proxy lottery processes. When the bonus winning process is determined by the bonus lottery process, the type of bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) is determined based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus and a precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on a precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined number of precursor games is stored in the precursor game number counter. After the process of S664, the sub CPU 71 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

In S661, when the sub CPU 71 determines that CZ is in progress (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a cut-in addition lottery process during CZ (S665). In the CZ cut-in addition lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to add “1” to the specified number of times based on the CZ cut-in addition lottery table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data for a “lottery request” including a command requesting a proxy lottery process for the cut-in addition lottery process in CZ and a winning number to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 acquires the result of the proxy lottery process (either “no addition” or “one addition for the specified number of times”) from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing. If it is determined to add “1” to the specified number of times, “1” is added to the CI number counter in CZ.
In addition, as the cut-in addition lottery process during CZ according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add “2” or more to the specified number of times.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won (S666). When the sub CPU 71 determines in S666 that the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) has been won (when S666 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines that “reverse-push navigation (aims at the black BAR)”. Is set (S667).

  If the winning number is “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”), the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR) As a result, the symbol combinations related to “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E” are stopped and displayed. Accordingly, when the winning number “4” is won and the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”, “black BAR” − “black BAR” corresponding to “C_BAR_A” is determined depending on the timing of the stop operation. ”-“ Black BAR ”symbol combination may be stopped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won, “reverse push navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won during CZ, the winning of the bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed according to “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” and the combination of symbols “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” is stopped and displayed, It is possible to recognize that a bonus (pseudo bonus) has been won.

  After the process of S667, the sub CPU 71 performs a bonus winning process (S668). In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 71 determines a bonus type (“SBB”, “BB”, or “RB”) based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus and a preparation flag (“SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag” or “RB preparation flag”). )

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a CZ end time process (S669). In the CZ end time process, the sub CPU 71 turns off the CZ flag and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CZ CI counter. After the process of S669, the sub CPU 71 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S666, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) has not been won (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 71 adds “1” to the CZ game number counter. (S670).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a cut-in occurrence lottery process during CZ (S671). In the CZ cut-in occurrence lottery process, it is determined whether or not to generate cut-in ("reverse-push navigation (aim for black BAR)") based on the CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 59). . Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits command data of a “lottery request” including a command for requesting a proxy lottery process for the cut-in occurrence lottery process during CZ to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 obtains the result of proxy lottery processing (either “no win” or “occurrence of losing cut-in”) from each sub device. And sub CPU71 employ | adopts one result as lottery results from the result of several acquired proxy lottery processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the occurrence of cut-in has been won (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the cut-in is not generated (when S672 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the normal mid-process, and the process is performed when the start command is received ( The process proceeds to S546 in FIG.

  In S672, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the occurrence of cut-in has been won (when S672 is YES), the sub CPU 71 sets “reverse-pressed navigation (black BAR aimed at navigation)” (S673). ).

  In the present embodiment, when “losing” is determined by the internal lottery process, in S671, whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (aiming at the black BAR)”) is determined. Therefore, even if it is determined in S671 that the cut-in is to be generated and the stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-push navigation (navigating black BAR)”, “black BAR” − “black BAR” − “black BAR”. The combination of symbols is not stopped.

  In the stop table selected at the time of “losing” in the present embodiment, when the stop order is “middle right” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR), a right display is displayed. The number of sliding pieces capable of stopping the “black BAR” is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of symbols “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” is stopped and displayed until the second stop.

  After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the CI number counter in CZ (S674). Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the CI number counter in CZ is “0” (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is not “0” (when S675 is NO), the sub CPU 71 terminates the normal mid-process and starts the process when the start command is received. The process proceeds to S546 of the process (see FIG. 98).

  In S675, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the CI number counter in CZ is “0” (when S675 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs CZ end time processing (S677). After the process of S677, the sub CPU 71 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a description will be given of the preparation process that is performed in S546 in the flowchart (see FIG. 98) of the start command reception process.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not preparation is in progress (S721). When the sub CPU 71 determines in S721 that it is not preparing (when S721 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the preparing process, and the process proceeds to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98). Move.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S721 that it is in preparation (when S721 is YES), the sub CPU 71 adds “1” to the preparation digestion G counter (S722).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operating condition table (see FIG. 71) to determine whether or not the operating condition is satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the operating condition is not satisfied in S724 (when S724 is NO), the sub CPU 71 turns off the corresponding preparation flag and clears the value of the preparation digestion G counter. (S725). After the process of S725, the sub CPU 71 ends the process in preparation and moves the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

[Precursor check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart (see FIG. 98) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the warning is in progress (S741). During the precursor, the value of the precursor game number counter is “1” or more. When the sub CPU 71 determines in S741 that the warning is not in progress (when S741 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the warning check process, and the process proceeds to S548 in the start command reception process (see FIG. 98). Move.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S741 that a sign is being made (when S741 is YES), the sub CPU 71 decrements the value of the sign game number counter by “1” (S742). However, if the preparation flag is on, the value of the precursor game number counter is not subtracted by “1”.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (S473). In S743, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (when S743 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the precursor check process and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S548 of the time process (see FIG. 98).

  In S743, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (when S743 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the CZ start time (S744). . Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a CZ start time based on a CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”).

  In S744, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is a CZ start time (when S744 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a CZ start time process (S745).

  In the CZ start time process, the sub CPU 71 turns off the corresponding precursor flag, and sets an initial value corresponding to the type of the CZ flag in the CI number counter in CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is “4”, and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is “10”. After the process of S745, the sub CPU 71 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S744, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not at the time of starting CZ (when S744 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is at the time of starting bonus (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a bonus start time based on a precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines in S746 that it is a bonus start time (when S746 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a bonus start time process (S747). In the bonus start process, the sub CPU 71 turns off the precursor flag and performs a bonus start process corresponding to the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag”, or “RB flag”) related to the pseudo bonus that is turned on. Do.

  When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 71 turns on the SBB preparation flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 71 turns on the BB preparation flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 71 turns on the RB preparation flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 71 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  In S746, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the bonus is not started (when S746 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the ART (second ART) is started (S748). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the ART (second ART) is started based on the ART precursor flag.

  In S748, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is the ART (second ART) start time (when S748 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs the ART start time process (S749). In the ART start process, the sub CPU 71 turns off the precursor flag and turns on the ART preparation flag. However, if the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART ready flag is not turned on. In the ART start process, the sub CPU 71 sets “50” in the ART game number counter. After the process of S749, the sub CPU 71 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the ART (second ART) is not started in S748 (when S748 is NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the BR start time (S750). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a BR start time based on the BR precursor flag.

  In S750, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not BR start time (when S 750 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the precursor check process, and the process is S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98). Move to.

  In S750, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is the BR start time (when S 750 is YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a BR continuation process (S752). After the process of S752, the sub CPU 71 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 98).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the reel stop command reception process performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S781). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” in S781 (when S781 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the reel stop command reception process and produces the process. The process proceeds to S526 in the content determination process (see FIG. 97).

  In S781, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when S781 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional added B flag is on. (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional extra B flag is not on (in the case where S782 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the reel stop command reception process, and the process is an effect content determination process (FIG. 97).

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional extra B flag is on in S782 (when S782 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs an extra extra B extra G number lottery process (S783). In the additional addition B addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition B addition G number lottery table (see FIG. 69), and adds the determined addition game number to the addition game number counter. To do. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the data according to the command for requesting the proxy lottery process for the additional extra B addition G number lottery process and the parameter for the proxy lottery process for requesting execution (for example, “1on”, Command data of “lottery request” including “2on_previous + 10”) is transmitted to each sub device. Next, the sub CPU 71 obtains the result of proxy lottery processing (any one of “0”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”) from each sub device. Then, the sub CPU 71 adopts one result as a lottery result from the obtained results of the plurality of proxy lottery processes, determines the number of added games, and adds the determined added number of games to the added game number counter.

  In addition addition B addition G number lottery processing, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of added games determined by the previous stop operation is obtained by referring to the added game number counter.

  After the processing of S783, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the operation is the third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation is not the third stop operation in S784 (in the case of NO determination in S784), the sub CPU 71 ends the reel stop command reception process, and performs the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97). ) To S526.

  When the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation is the third stop operation in S784 (in the case where S784 is YES), the sub CPU 71 performs an additional extra B end time process (S785). In the process at the end of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 71 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the added game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the added game number counter is cleared. After the process of S785, the sub CPU 71 ends the reel stop command reception process, and moves the process to S526 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the non-operation command reception process performed in S536 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” (when S801 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the no-operation command reception process and the contents of the effects. The determination process (see FIG. 97) is also terminated.

  In S801, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when S801 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional added C flag is on. (S802). In S802, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional extra C flag is not on (in the case of NO determination in S802), the sub CPU 71 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIG. 97). See also).

  In S802, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the additional extra C flag is on (when S802 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S803). The number of inserted games is the number of games that can be started, which means that a start operation can be accepted.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S803 is NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIG. 97) also ends.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S803 is YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is ON (S804). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

  In S804, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BET switch 62 is not on (in the case of NO determination in S804), the sub CPU 71 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97). ) Also ends.

  In S804, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the BET switch 62 is on (in the case of YES determination in S804), the sub CPU 71 performs additional addition C addition G number lottery processing (S805).

  In the additional addition C addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 71 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition C addition G number lottery table. Then, the determined additional game number is added to the value of the additional game number counter. In addition, in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process, when the number of additional games of “1” or more is determined, “continuation” of the additional addition C is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “continuation” is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S806). When the sub CPU 71 determines that “continuation” has been determined in S806 (when S806 is YES), the sub CPU 71 terminates the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97). Also ends.

In S806, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “continuation” has not been determined (NO in S806), the sub CPU 71 performs an additional addition C end process (S807). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 71 turns off the additional addition C flag (“addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag”, or “addition addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 71 adds the value of the added game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the value of the added game number counter is cleared.
After the process of S807, the sub CPU 71 ends the no-operation command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIG. 97).

[First action]
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, and the lower LED that have received the “sub control board verification request” (see FIG. 14) from the sub control board 42. The control board 270 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as an LED control board) and the accessory control board 280 are sub-controls that collate the collation code received from the sub-control board 42 with the collation code stored by itself. Perform board verification processing. In the sub-control board verification process, when it is determined that the verification code stored in the flash memory 242, 252, 262, 272, 282 and the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 do not match, Perform warning processing. In the abnormality warning process, the LED control board lights the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d (see FIG. 2) with a predetermined warning lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern at the time of production. Further, in the abnormality warning process, the accessory control board 280 drives the stepping motor of the rotating accessory unit 122 (see FIG. 2) with a predetermined warning pulse pattern different from the pulse pattern at the time of production. For this reason, those who see the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d that are lit in the warning lighting pattern (for example, hall manager) and those who see the rotating accessory 123 (see FIG. 4) that rotates faster than the production time (for example, the hall). The administrator) can be informed and recognized that the verification codes do not match in the sub-control board verification process. That is, it can be notified that the sub-control board 42 has been illegally replaced.

  In addition, in the sub-control board verification process, when a mismatch between the verification code stored in the flash memory 242, 252, 262, 272, and 282 and the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 occurs, It is also possible that the device side has been exchanged illegally. Even in such a case, the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 perform the abnormality warning process in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, so that a person who watches the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, and 21d that are lit in the warning lighting pattern (for example, , Hall manager) and those who see the rotating accessory 123 that rotates faster than at the time of production (for example, the hall manager) are notified that the collating codes do not match in the sub-control board collation process. Can be made. That is, it can be notified that the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 have been illegally replaced.

  Further, in the communication operation between the sub control board 42, the LED control board, and the accessory control board 280, when communication disconnection occurs, the LED control board and the accessory control board 280 perform an abnormality warning process. For this reason, the LEDs 21a, 21b, 21c, which are lit in the warning lighting pattern, indicate that the communication interruption that is likely to occur when any of the sub-control board 42, the LED control board, and the accessory control board 280 is illegally replaced. A person who sees 21d (for example, a hall manager) and a person who sees the rotating combination 123 that rotates faster than the time of production (for example, a hall manager) can be notified and recognized.

[Second action]
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the 24h door monitoring unit 290 that has received the “sub-control board verification request” (see FIG. 13) from the sub-control board 42 receives the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 and itself. Sub-control board verification processing is performed to verify the stored verification code. Further, in the sub-control board verification process, verification is information indicating the determination result that the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 does not match the verification code stored in the flash memory 292 and the time when this determination is performed. The result information is stored in the flash memory 292. Further, when the 24h door monitoring unit 290 receives a monitoring history request, which is a command for requesting transmission of monitoring history information including verification result information, from the sub control board 42, the monitoring history information stored in the flash memory 292 is stored in the sub-history information. Monitoring history information transmission processing to be transmitted to the control board 42 is performed. The sub control board 42 receives the monitoring history information from the 24h door monitoring unit 290, stores it in the SRAM 74, and displays a monitoring history screen (see FIG. 11) on the liquid crystal display device 11 for displaying the monitoring history information in response to a request. Display on the screen. For this reason, it is possible to notify a person (e.g., a hall manager) who views the monitoring history screen that the verification codes do not match in the sub-control board verification process and recognize them. That is, it can be notified that the sub-control board 42 has been illegally replaced.

  In addition, in the sub-control board verification process, if a mismatch between the verification code stored in the flash memory 292 and the verification code received from the sub-control board 42 occurs, the sub-device side is exchanged illegally. Cases are also conceivable. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the 24h door monitoring unit 290 has been illegally replaced.

  The monitoring history screen (FIG. 11) also displays communication disconnection information indicating that communication disconnection has occurred in the communication operation of the sub-control board 42 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290. For this reason, a person who views the monitoring history screen (for example, a hall manager) is notified that a communication disconnection that is likely to occur when either the sub control board 42 or the 24h door monitoring unit 290 is illegally replaced. Can be recognized.

[Third action]
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the GPU board 220, the sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, which are sub devices that have received the “lottery request” (see FIGS. 12 to 15) from the sub control board 42, the right The partial LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270, the accessory control board 280, and the 24h door monitoring unit 290 perform proxy lottery processing for performing various lotteries instead of the sub control board 42. For this reason, the sub-control board 42 performs processing for reading various data (image data, audio data, lighting pattern data, pulse pattern data, etc.) relating to the determined effect contents from the sub-ROM 72 and the various data read out to each sub-device. Resources can be allocated for processing to send to. Accordingly, the control burden on the sub control board 42 can be reduced.

  In addition, these sub devices have data (for example, FIG. 57 to FIG. 57) necessary for the proxy lottery process in the start-up operation that is a communication operation between the sub control board 42 and the sub devices. 70 is received from the sub-control board 42 and stored therein. For this reason, it is not necessary to store data necessary for the proxy lottery processing in advance in the sub device. Therefore, the versatility of the sub device can be ensured without dedicating the sub device to a specific model.

[Fourth action]
In the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, the communication LSI 79 of the sub-control board 42, the GPU board 220, the sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED Communication between the control board 270, the accessory control board 280, and the communication LSIs 223, 243, 253, 263, 273, 283, 293 (see FIG. 10) of the door monitoring unit 290 can be encrypted. it can. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unauthorized simplification or tampering of communication contents.

<Modification>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub control board 42 requests each sub device to perform the same type of lottery processing, and one lottery result is obtained from the results of the plurality of proxy lottery processing acquired from each sub device. The mode to be adopted has been described. However, instead of this, the sub control board 42 may request the proxy lottery process for only one subdevice in the subdevice group for each lottery process, and adopt the result as the lottery result. Good. For example, the sub control board 42 requests only the GPU board 220 for the proxy lottery process for the CZ entry lottery process, requests the proxy lottery process for the bonus lottery process only for the sound I / O board 230, and performs the ART lottery process during the BB. The proxy lottery process may be requested only from the accessory control board 280.
In this case, the sub device that is the request destination of the proxy lottery process may be determined in advance for each type of lottery process. Further, when requesting execution of proxy lottery processing, the request destination of proxy lottery processing may be determined by lottery processing, for example, lottery processing using random numbers.

  Further, when the sub control board 42 requests each sub device to execute the same type of lottery processing, and employs one result as a lottery result from the results of a plurality of proxy lottery processing acquired from each sub device. It may be determined whether or not the results of the plurality of obtained proxy lottery processes are included within a predetermined threshold. In this case, if there is a result of proxy lottery processing that is not included within the predetermined threshold, the sub-control board 42 intervenes in some sort of fraud in communication with the sub-device from which the result is obtained or with the sub-device. You may alert | report. As a notification method, for example, a predetermined notification screen (not shown) is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  In addition, a notification device such as an LED is connected to the sound I / O board 230, and the verification code stored in the flash memory 232 and the verification code received from the secondary control board 42 in the secondary control board verification process LED may be caused to emit light when it is determined that they do not match, and when it is detected that communication interruption has occurred in the communication operation with the sub-control board 42. As a result, it is possible to notify that the verification codes do not match in the sub-control board verification process and that the communication disconnection has occurred.

  In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine or a slot machine called “pachinko”. Here, a configuration example of a pachinko is described.

[Configuration of pachinko machines]
First, the configuration of the pachinko will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. FIG. 109 is a perspective view showing an external configuration of a pachinko in a modified example. FIG. 110 is an external front view of a pachinko in a modified example. FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration of a pachinko in a modified example. FIG. 112 is a front view of a pachinko game board according to a modification.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the pachinko 310 includes a glass door 311, a wooden frame 312, a base door 313, a game board 314, a dish unit 320, a liquid crystal display device 332 that displays an image, and a launcher that launches a game ball. 430, a payout unit 800, a substrate unit 850, and the like.

  The base door 313 is attached to the wooden frame 312 so as to be freely opened and closed. A main door monitoring switch 383 and a sub door monitoring switch 384 (see FIG. 113) are provided on the back side of the base door 313. The wooden frame 312 is provided with a switch contact portion (not shown) that contacts the main door monitoring switch 383 and the sub door monitoring switch 384 when the base door 313 is closed. The main door monitoring switch 383 and the sub door monitoring switch 384 are separated from the switch contact portion when the base door 313 is open.

  When the main door monitoring switch 383 is in contact with the switch contact portion, the main door monitoring switch 383 outputs a signal indicating the closed state of the base door 313 to the main control circuit 360 described later. A signal indicating a state where 313 is opened is output to the main control circuit 360. Further, when the sub door monitoring switch 384 is in contact with the switch contact portion, the sub door monitoring switch 384 outputs a signal indicating the closed state of the base door 313 to the 24h door monitoring unit 590 described later, and is separated from the switch contact portion. Then, a signal indicating the open state of the base door 313 is output to the door monitoring unit for 24 hours.

  The glass door 311 is attached so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the base door 313. In addition, an opening 311a is formed at the center of the glass door 311, and a protective glass 319 having light transmittance is attached to the opening 311a. The protective glass 319 is disposed so that the back surface thereof faces the front surface of the game board 314 when the glass door 311 is closed.

  The glass door 311 is provided with an upper LED 432a, a right LED 432b, a left LED 432c, and a lower LED 432d. The upper LED 432a, the right LED 432b, the left LED 432c, and the lower LED 432d are composed of an LED that is turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content, and a cover that covers the LED and has translucency. The upper LED 432 a is provided on the upper part of the glass door 311. The right LED 432b is provided on the right side of the glass door 311 when the pachinko 310 is viewed from the front. The left LED 432c is provided on the left part of the glass door 311 when the pachinko 310 is viewed from the front. The lower LED 432 d is provided at the lower part of the glass door 311.

  The dish unit 320 is a unit body in which the upper dish 321 and the lower dish 322 are integrated, and is attached to the lower part of the glass door 311 at the base door 313. Further, the lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321. On the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, payout outlets 321a and 322a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls) are formed, respectively. When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 through the payout ports 321a and 322a, respectively. In particular, the upper plate 321 has a game area 315 to be described later. A game ball for firing is stored.

  The launching device 430 is attached to the lower right position of the base door 313 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachinko 310. The launching device 430 includes a launching handle 326 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 327 that fits in the space at the lower right of the dish unit 320. The firing handle 326 is provided on the front side of the panel body 327. A driving device for launching a game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 327.

  A plate unit 320 and a launcher 430 are attached to the base door 313, and the panel body 327 is provided integrally with the lower right portion of the plate unit 320. Then, the pachinko game is advanced by operating the launch handle 326 by the player.

  The game board 314 is disposed so as to be positioned on the back surface of the protective glass 319 and on the front surface side of the base door 313. Further, a spacer 331, a liquid crystal display device 332, and the like are disposed on the back side of the game board 314. Further, a payout unit 800 and a substrate unit 850 are disposed on the back side of the base door 313. A speaker 346 is disposed below the lower plate 322. The speaker 346 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 500 and outputs a predetermined effect sound to produce a game.

  The game board 314 is entirely made of a substantially plate-like resin material having light permeability. Examples of the resin material having optical transparency include various resin materials such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin. In addition, the game board 314 has a game area 315 in which a game ball launched by the launching device 430 can roll down, and the game area 315 is provided on the front side of the game board. The game area 315 is an area surrounded by the guide rail 330 (specifically, an outer rail 330a shown in FIG. 112 described later), and is an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a plurality of game nails 318 are provided by being driven into the game board 314 in the game area 315 of the game board 314. Note that the configuration of the game board 314 shown in FIG. 112 is one configuration example of a game board including a game area in which a game ball can roll, and is not limited thereto.

  The liquid crystal display device 332 is disposed on the back side (back side) of the game board 314. In other words, the liquid crystal display device 332 is disposed behind the game board 314 made of a light-transmitting material. The liquid crystal display device 332 includes a display area 332a that enables display of an image relating to a game. The display area 332a is arranged so as to overlap all or part of the back surface of the game board 314.

  In other words, the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332 is arranged on the back side of the game board 314 so as to overlap at least all or part of the game area 315 of the game board 314. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 332 is arranged on the back side of the game board 314 so that the display area 332 a overlaps with all or part of the game area 315 and all or part of the game area outer area 316. . In the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332, various images such as an effect identification symbol, an effect image, and an ornamental decoration image are displayed.

  The spacer 331 is disposed between the back (rear side) of the game board 314 and the front (front side) of the liquid crystal display device 332, and defines a space that becomes a flow path of the game ball rolling on the game board 314. To do. An LED unit 353 (see FIG. 112) is provided below the spacer 331. The spacer 331 is formed of a light transmissive material. In this example, the spacer 331 is formed of a light-transmitting material. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part of the spacer 331 is formed of a light-transmitting material. May be. Further, the spacer 331 may be formed of a material that does not have optical transparency.

  The firing handle 326 is rotatable, and a firing solenoid (not shown) as a driving device is provided on the back side of the firing handle 326. In addition, a touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the peripheral edge of the firing handle 326. Furthermore, a firing volume (not shown) is provided inside the firing handle 326 to change the electric power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown) by changing the resistance value according to the rotation amount of the firing handle 326.

  When the player touches a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the peripheral edge of the firing handle 326, it is detected that the firing handle 326 is gripped by the player. When the firing handle 326 is gripped by the player and is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side (player side), the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle. Then, electric power corresponding to the resistance value at this time is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 are sequentially launched into the game area 315 of the game board 314, and the game is advanced. When a firing stop button (not shown) is pressed, the game ball is stopped firing even when the firing handle 326 is gripped and rotated.

  A decorative member in which three general winning holes 356a, 356b, and 356c are formed is disposed in the lower left area of the game board 314, and the portion of the decorative member that faces the LED unit 353 is transparent. Yes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 112, the LED unit 353 is visible from the lower left area of the game board 314. The LED unit 353 includes a special symbol display device, a normal symbol display device 333, a first special symbol hold display LED 334a, 334b, a second special symbol hold display LED 334c, 334d, a normal symbol hold display LED 350a, 350b, etc. Reference) is provided.

  In this example, the special symbol display device is constituted by 16 LEDs. These 16 LEDs are divided into two groups of 8 LEDs, and details will be described later, but one group performs variable display in response to a start winning at the first start port 325. Yes, the other group performs variable display in response to a start winning at the second start port 344. For convenience of explanation, in the following description, one LED group is a first special symbol display device 335a (see FIG. 113 described later), and the other LED group is a second special symbol display device 335b (see FIG. 113 described later). Called.

  The LEDs of the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b perform variable display that repeatedly turns on and off in units of groups when a predetermined special symbol variable display start condition is satisfied. Then, the display pattern formed by turning on / off the eight LEDs is stopped and displayed as a special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol). When the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is in a specific stop display mode, the gaming state shifts from a normal gaming state to a winning gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. In this win game state, as will be described later, the shutter 340 (see FIG. 112) is controlled to be in an open state, and the special winning opening 339 (see FIG. 112) can receive a game ball. It becomes.

  In other words, the game in which the big winning opening 339 is opened is a winning game, and in this example, two types of winning games, a big hit game and a small hit game, are prepared. In addition, it is a big hit that the special symbol becomes a stop display mode in which it shifts to the big hit gaming state, and a special symbol becomes a stop display mode in which the special symbol goes to the small hit gaming state.

  The difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described later. In the case of the big hit, there is a high possibility that a lot of balls can be obtained. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, the gaming state is maintained. As described above, a game in which a special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and the game state is shifted or maintained according to the result is referred to as a “special symbol game”.

  A normal symbol display device 333 is provided below the special symbol display device. The normal symbol display device 333 is composed of two display lamps, and the normal symbols are variably displayed by alternately turning on and off these display lamps. A game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed and then stopped is displayed, and the open / closed state of the normal electric accessory 348 (see FIG. 112) differs depending on the result, which is referred to as a “normal symbol game”.

  Below the normal symbol display device 333, normal symbol hold display LEDs 350a and 350b are provided. The normal symbol hold display LEDs 350a and 350b display the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbols that are held by turning on, turning off, or blinking (so-called “hold number”, “hold number related to normal symbols”).

  Specifically, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held for one time, the normal symbol hold display LED 350a is turned on and the normal symbol hold display LED 350b is turned off. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held twice, the normal symbol hold display LED 350a is turned on, and the normal symbol hold display LED 350b is turned on. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held three times, the normal symbol hold display LED 350a blinks and the normal symbol hold display LED 350b lights. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is held four times, the normal symbol hold display LED 350a blinks and the normal symbol hold display LED 350b blinks.

  Below the normal symbol hold display LEDs 350a and 350b, first special symbol hold display LEDs 334a and 334b and second special symbol hold display LEDs 334c and 334d are provided. The first special symbol hold display LEDs 334a and 334b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 334c and 334d indicate the number of executions of the variable symbol display that is held by turning on, turning off, or blinking (so-called “hold number”, “special symbols”). Display the number of pending items "). The display mode of the number of reserved symbols related to the special symbol by the first special symbol hold display LEDs 334a and 334b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 334c and 334d is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold number by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 350a and 350b. is there.

  On the side of the normal symbol display device 333, a hit notification LED (not shown) that is lit regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit is provided. In this example, since the number of rounds is constant, an LED for displaying the number of rounds is not provided. Therefore, on the display of the hit notification LED controlled by the main control circuit 360 (see FIG. 113 described later), there is no difference in notification of the big hit and the small hit. In addition, as will be described later, the opening / closing pattern of the shutter 340 is also selected from the same between the large hit and the small hit, and the sub control circuit 500 (see FIG. 113 described later). The effects produced by the liquid crystal display device 332, the LED 432, the speaker 346, the rotating accessory 471, which will be described later, and the like are also the same. For this reason, the player cannot discriminate them visually even between the sudden big hit and the small hit.

  In addition, in the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332 arranged on the back side (back side) of the game board 314, display is performed by the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b (see FIG. 113 described later). The effect image related to the special symbol to be displayed is displayed.

  For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b, the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332 is composed of numbers except for specific cases. Identification symbols (which are also identification information for effects), for example, numbers such as “1-8” are variably displayed. In addition, for example, the special symbols that have been variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b are stopped and displayed, and the identification symbols for presentation are also displayed on the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332 Is stopped.

  Further, in the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player can grasp that it is a win. The effect image is displayed in the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332. Specifically, in either one of the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a jackpot that can be obtained by many balls. In such a case, the combination of effect identification symbols displayed in the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332 is stopped in a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a specific display mode (for example, a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, a big hit effect image is displayed in the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332. In addition, in the case of hits where it is difficult to obtain a lot of balls (small hits, 15 hits, big hits, 16 hits, big hits), the liquid crystal display device 332 displays an effect image that allows the player to grasp that it is a win. It is not necessary to display in the area 332a.

  As shown in FIG. 112, on the game board 314 of the pachinko 310, a guide rail 330 (230a and 230b), a stage 355, a first start port 325, a second start port 344, a passage gate 354, a shutter 340, a big prize. Game members such as the mouth 339, the general winning openings 356a, 356b, 356c, 356d, and the ordinary electric accessory 348 are provided.

  A substantially inverted L-shaped stage 355 is provided on the top of the game board 314. In addition, a guide rail 330 is provided so as to surround the game area 315.

  The guide rail 330 includes an outer rail 330a that partitions (defines) the game area 315, and an inner rail 330b that is disposed inside the outer rail 330a. The game balls launched by the launching device 430 are guided by guide rails 330 provided on the game board 314 and moved to the upper part of the game board 314, and then provided on the plurality of game nails 318 and the game board 314. Due to the collision with the stage 355 and the like, it flows down toward the lower side of the game board 314 while changing its traveling direction. Specifically, as a game ball flow down system, a system that flows down the left side of the stage 355 (so-called left-handed) and a shooting handle 326 is rotated to the right to the maximum, and the game ball is driven into the right side of the stage 355. There is a system that flows down the right side of the stage 355 (so-called right-handed).

  A first start port 325 is provided below the stage 355 and below the center of the game board 314. A passage gate 354 is provided on the upper right side of the stage 355, and a second starting port 344 is provided below the passage gate 354. An ordinary electric accessory 348 is provided at the second start port 344. The ordinary electric accessory 348 includes a tongue-like member 348a that projects and retracts in the front-rear direction with respect to the plate surface of the game board 314. In this example, when the tongue-like member 348a protrudes, the game ball riding on the tongue-like member 348a wins the second starting port 344, and when the tongue-like member 348a is retracted, the game ball is second. The start opening 344 is configured not to win a prize.

  When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the predetermined symbol in the normal symbol display device 333 (see FIG. 113 described later), the tongue-like member 348a in the normal electric accessory 348 is in the protruding state from the retracted state for a predetermined time. The game ball can easily enter the second start port 344. Note that the ordinary electric accessory 348 is not limited to the one in which the tongue-shaped member 348a protrudes and retracts, and may be one in which a pair of blade members are opened and closed (so-called electric tulips).

  In addition, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the stage 355, the game nail 318 is driven into a path along which the game ball rolls from the right side of the stage 355 to the first start port 325. It is impossible for the game ball to win the first starting port 325 from the right side of the stage 355.

  When a game ball passes through the passing gate 354 during the normal symbol variation display, the display mode by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 350a and 350b is switched, and the passing gate is displayed until the normal symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the normal symbol variation display based on the passing of the game ball to 354 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed normal symbol that has been suspended is started.

  When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 333, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the normal symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 332a of the liquid crystal display device 332. You may be made to do.

  In addition, a shutter 340 that opens and closes the grand prize winning port 339 is disposed immediately below the first start port 325. An out port 357 is formed at the lowermost portion of the game area 315 immediately below the shutter 340. Three general winning holes 356a, 356b, and 356c are provided in the lower left portion of the game area 315. In addition, a general winning opening 356d is provided at the lower right side of the game area 315.

  In addition, a winning area is provided in the first starting opening 325 described above, and a first starting winning opening switch 416 (see FIG. 113 described later) is provided in the winning area. A winning area is provided in the second starting opening 344, and a second starting winning opening switch 417 (see FIG. 113 to be described later) is provided in the winning area. When a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the first start winning a prize opening switch 416, the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 335a is started.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first start opening 325 during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the first start opening 325 until the special symbol during the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the special symbol variation display based on is suspended. Thereafter, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed suspended special symbol is started. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 335a based on the game ball entering the first start port 325 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  Further, when a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the second start winning a prize opening switch 417, the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 335b is started. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 344 during the variation display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the second start port 344 until the special symbol during the variation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the special symbol variation display based on is suspended. Thereafter, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed suspended special symbol is started.

  In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 335b based on the game ball entering the second start port 344 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In this example, the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b do not change the special symbol at the same time. Further, in this example, the special symbol variation display is performed with priority given to the start winning at the second start port 344. The first start port 325 and the second start port 344 in this example are examples of a start region provided in the game region of the game board 314 and through which a game ball can pass.

  In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended, and the special symbol variable display is suspended due to entering the first start port 325 and the second start port 344. The upper limit of the number is set to 4 times. Specifically, when the special symbol game of the first special symbol is held four times, information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is the main RAM 370 (see FIG. 113 described later). The information of the four special symbol games stored as the start memory information in the first special symbol start memory area (0) of the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory It is stored in the area (4) as starting storage information.

  Similarly, for the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the main information. The information of the four special symbol games stored and stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 370 (see FIG. 113 described later) is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1 ) To the second special symbol start storage area (4). Therefore, in this example, the special symbol game can be held up to 8 times.

  In addition, as another variable display start condition for the predetermined special symbol in this example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, every time a predetermined special symbol variable display start condition is satisfied, the special symbol variable display is started.

  In the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b, when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode and the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the shutter 340 is in an open state in which it is easy to accept the game ball. It is driven to become. As a result, the special winning opening 339 is in an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be easily received.

On the other hand, the special winning opening 339 provided on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 340 has an area (not shown) having a count switch 404 (see FIG. 113 to be described later), and a predetermined number of game balls ( The shutter 340 is driven to be in an open state until a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) elapses. When either a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the grand prize opening 339 or a predetermined time has elapsed in the open state, the shutter 340 is driven so as to be in a closed state where it is difficult to accept the game balls. . As a result, the special winning opening 339 is in a closed state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball (second state).

  Note that a game in which the special winning opening 339 easily accepts a game ball for a certain time is called a round game. Therefore, the shutter 340 is opened during the round game and is closed between the round games. The number of round games is counted as the number of rounds such as “1” round and “2” round. For example, the first round game may be referred to as the first round and the second round as the second round. In this example, in one round, the shutter 340 is opened and closed a plurality of times, and the open time may be set as a certain time.

  Next, the shutter 340 driven from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state) is driven to the open state again. That is, when the round game is finished, it is possible to continue to the next round game. A game from the first round game until the end of the round game (final round game) that cannot continue to the next round game is referred to as a special game or a jackpot game. In this example, the number of round games in all jackpots is 15 rounds.

  Further, in this example, when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display device 335a and the second special symbol display device 335b, and the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the big prize opening 339 is displayed. The shutter 340 is driven so as to be in an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball 15 times or 16 times. The small hit game is a game in which the big winning opening 339 is opened 15 times or 16 times, and there is no concept of a round game like the big win. However, the configuration of the above-described prize winning opening 339 and the shutter 340 is provided on the game board 314 and can be changed between an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter. It is an example of 1 structure of a variable member.

  Further, when a game ball is won in the first start port 325, the second start port 344, the general winning ports 356a to 356d, and the big winning port 339, the number of game balls set in advance according to the type of each winning port. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322.

  Further, in this example, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state shifts to a short time state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes a high probability state, and the holding ball of the special symbol game is easily stored by the support by the ordinary electric game 348. There is a case. In this example, in the short-time state, passing the game ball through the passing gate 354 is a condition for executing the normal symbol lottery, so that the game proceeds while making a right strike.

  Further, when a big hit occurs in the right-handed state, it is possible to win the big winning opening 339 by continuing the right-handed as it is. In addition, when the support by the ordinary electric accessory 348 is not received, the game is advanced while making a left strike.

  In addition, a rotating accessory unit 470 is provided on the game board 314 of the pachinko 310. The rotating accessory unit 470 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 314, and an accessory driving unit 472 (see FIG. 113) including a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 471 and a stepping motor that rotates the rotating accessory 471. ) And. The rotating combination 471 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 500 and rotates in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect when a predetermined effect is performed, thereby producing a game.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 112, three effect buttons 380a, 380b, and 380c are provided on the front side of the upper plate 321, and during these mini-games such as a push game, a card flip, and a sugoroku, By pressing the effect button, the effect display content on the liquid crystal display device 332 can be changed.

[Pachinko circuit configuration]
Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko 310 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko 310 of this example.

  The pachinko 310 is mainly configured by a main control circuit 360 configured by a main control board that controls a game, and a sub control circuit 500 configured by a sub control board that controls an effect according to the progress of the game. Is done.

  The main control circuit 360 includes a main CPU 366, a main ROM 368 (read-only memory), and a main RAM 370 (read / write memory).

  The main CPU 366 is connected to the main ROM 368, the main RAM 370, and the like, and has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 368.

  The main ROM 368 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko 310 by the main CPU 366, various programs for causing the main CPU 366 to execute main processing, and various tables necessary for various processing.

  The main RAM 370 is a temporary storage area of the main CPU 366 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values necessary for various processes. In this example, an example in which the main RAM 370 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 366 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary storage area of the main CPU 366 may be any storage medium that can be read and written. Things can be used.

  The main control circuit 360 includes an initial reset circuit 364, an I / O port 371, and a command output port 372. The initial reset circuit 364 is a circuit that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 366. The I / O port 371 is a port that transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 366, and a port that transmits output signals from the main CPU 366 to various devices. The command output port 372 is a port for transmitting a command output from the main CPU 366 to the sub control circuit 500.

  The main control circuit 360 includes a backup capacitor 374. The backup capacitor 374 is provided, for example, to supply power to the main RAM 370 quickly when power is interrupted. As a result, various data stored in the main RAM 370 can be held even when power is interrupted.

  Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 360.

  In this example, as various devices that respond to signals output from the main control circuit 360, a first special symbol display device 335a and a second special symbol display device 335b that perform variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and a special symbol game First special symbol hold display LEDs 334a and 334b and second special symbol hold display LEDs 334c and 334d for displaying the number of reserved special symbols for variable display, and a normal symbol display device for performing variable display of normal symbols as identification symbols in a normal symbol game 333, normal symbol hold display LEDs 350a and 350b for displaying the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, the start-port solenoid 418 for bringing the tongue-like member 348a of the normal electric accessory 348 into the protruding state or the retracting state, and the shutter 340 , And the grand prize opening 339 is opened or closed Winning opening solenoid 420 such that the state is connected to the main control circuit 360.

  The main control circuit 360 is used to transmit data to a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. An external terminal board 610 is connected.

  Further, the main control circuit 360 includes, for example, a count switch 404 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 360 when the game ball passes through an area of the big winning opening 339, and general winning holes 356a to 356d. When a game ball passes, the main prize-winning switch 406, 408, 410, 412 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 360 when the game ball passes, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 354, When the game ball wins the passing gate switch 414 and the first starting port 325 supplied to the control circuit 360, the first starting winning port switch 416 and the second starting port 344 that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 360. When a game ball wins, a second start winning port switch 417 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 360, a back-up at power failure, etc. Such as backup clear switch 424 to be cleared in accordance with the Pudeta operation of the gaming field of administrators is connected.

  The main control circuit 360 is connected to a payout / firing control circuit 426. The payout / firing control circuit 426 is connected to a payout device 428 for paying out game balls, a launch device 430 for firing game balls, and a card unit 600. The card unit 600 can be transmitted / received to / from a ball lending operation panel 455 that outputs a signal for requesting the card unit 600 to lend a game ball by a player's operation.

  The payout / launch control circuit 426 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 360 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 600, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 428. The game ball payout operation by the payout device 428 is controlled. Further, the payout / firing control circuit 426 supplies power to the firing solenoid according to the turning angle when the launching handle 326 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. Controls the launch operation of the sphere.

[Sub-control circuit (sub-control board)]
A sub control circuit 500 is connected to the command output port 372. The sub-control circuit 500 controls various effects according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 360, that is, controls the rotating accessory unit 470, display control in the liquid crystal display device 332, and sound generated from the speaker 346. And control of lamps (LEDs) including the upper LED 432a, the right LED 432b, the left LED 432c, the lower LED 432d, and the like. The sub-control circuit 500 has the same configuration as that of the sub-control circuit 47 (sub-control board 42) described in the pachislot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, and can execute the same various processes.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the sub control circuit 500 is electrically connected to a sub device group 900, an enter switch 381a, a select switch 382a, and an effect button 380, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 500 determines effect data based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 360, input information from the enter switch 381a, the select switch 382a, and the effect button 380. Then, the sub control circuit 500 outputs the determined effect data to various sub devices in the sub device group 900. As a result, a predetermined effect is executed by the subdevice.

  The select switch 382a detects whether or not the player has pressed a select button 382 (see FIG. 109) provided on the pachinko 310. The select switch 382a displays a signal corresponding to the selection operation content of the player, for example, a display mode (for example, indicating which item is selected from a plurality of selectable items displayed on the menu screen or the like) , An icon) is output to the sub-control circuit 500.

  The enter switch 381a detects whether or not the player has pressed the enter button 381 (see FIG. 109) provided on the pachinko 310. Then, the enter switch 381a outputs a signal corresponding to the determination operation content of the player, for example, a signal indicating that the player has selected an item in the selected state to the sub control circuit 500. That is, the player can select a predetermined item by pressing the select button 382 on the menu screen or the like until the predetermined item to be selected is selected, and then pressing the predetermined item with the enter button 381. .

  As shown in FIG. 113, the sub device group 900 includes a liquid crystal display device 332, a speaker 346, an upper LED 432a, a right LED 432b, a left LED 432c, a lower LED 432d, a rotating accessory unit 470, a sub door monitoring switch 384, and an effect button. 380. Since the configuration of these sub devices is as described above, description of these sub devices is omitted here.

  The sub-device group 900 includes a GPU board 520, a sound I / O board 530, an upper LED control board 540, a right LED control board 550, a left LED control board 560, a lower LED control board 570, and an accessory control board 580. And 24h door monitoring unit 590. Note that the configuration of the sub device group 900 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 113, and can be changed as appropriate according to, for example, the type of pachinko machine. For example, sub-devices other than the sub-devices included in the sub-device group 900 shown in FIG. 113 may be further included, or any one of them may not be provided.

  The GPU substrate 520 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the liquid crystal display device 332. The sound I / O board 530 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the speaker 346. The upper LED control board 540 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the upper LED 432a. The right LED control board 550 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the right LED 432b. The left LED control board 560 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the left LED 432c. The lower LED control board 570 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the lower LED 432d. The accessory control board 580 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the rotating accessory unit 470. The 24h door monitoring unit 590 is connected to the sub control circuit 500 and the sub door monitoring switch 384. Note that the GPU board 520, the sound I / O board 530, the upper LED control board 540, the right LED control board 550, the left LED control board 560, the lower LED control board 570, the accessory control board 580, and the 24h door of the pachinko 310. The configuration and functions of the monitoring unit 590 are the Pachislot 1 GPU board 220, the sound I / O board 230, the upper LED control board 240, the right LED control board 250, the left LED control board 260, the lower LED control board 270, Since it is the same as the structure and function of the object control board 280 and the 24h door monitoring unit 290, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  GPU board 520, sound I / O board 530, upper LED control board 540, right LED control board 550, left LED control board 560, lower LED control board 570, accessory control board 580 and 24h door monitoring unit 590 Instead of the sub-control circuit 500, proxy lottery processing for performing various types of lottery (for example, lottery for determining production contents) is performed. In addition, these sub devices perform loading processing for receiving and storing data necessary for proxy lottery processing (for example, various data tables necessary for lottery) from the sub-control circuit 500. In addition, the sound I / O board 530, the upper LED control board 540, the right LED control board 550, the left LED control board 560, the lower LED control board 570, the accessory control board 580, and the 24h door monitoring unit 590 are sub-controls. A sub-control board verification process is performed in which a verification code received from the sub-control circuit 500 is compared with a verification code stored by itself in order to detect a gossip such as unauthorized replacement of the circuit 500.

  As described above, also in the pachinko 310 of the modified example described above, the same operational effects as in the embodiment of the pachislot 1 are obtained.

  As a modification, the pachinko 310 provided with the main door monitoring switch 383 and the sub door monitoring switch 384 for detecting the open / closed state of the base door 313 has been described. However, instead of the main door monitoring switch 383 and the sub door monitoring switch 384, the pachinko 310 may be provided with a main door monitoring switch and a sub door monitoring switch for detecting the open / closed state of the glass door 311. The main door monitoring switch 383 and the sub door monitoring switch 384 that detect the open / closed state of the base door 313, and the main door monitoring switch and the sub door monitoring switch that detect the open / closed state of the glass door 311 are also included in the pachinko 310. May be provided. In this case, the information displayed in the content column on the monitoring history screen (see FIG. 11) is displayed in a manner that allows identification between information relating to the base door 313 and information relating to the glass door 311. For example, information indicating that the base door 313 is opened is displayed as “BASE_OPEN”, and information indicating that the glass door 311 is closed is displayed as “GLASS_CLOSE”.

  The gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention has been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and it goes without saying that various embodiments are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot, 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 20L, 20R ... Speaker, 21a ... Upper LED, 21b ... Right LED, 21c ... Left LED, 21d ... Lower LED, 28 ... Enter button, 29 ... Select button, 31 ... Main door monitoring switch, 32 ... Sub door monitoring switch, 33 ... Switch contact part, 41 ... Main control board, 42 ... Sub control board, 47 ... Sub Control circuit 60 ... Main control circuit, 61L Stepping motor, 71 ... Sub CPU, 72 ... Sub ROM, 73 ... Sub RAM, 79 ... Communication LSI, 91 ... Main control circuit, 100 ... Sub device group, 122 ... Rotating accessory Unit: 123 ... Rotating accessory 201: Dedicated controller 202 ... Setting register 204 ... AES circuit, 208 ... first SPI, 209 ... first I2C, 220 ... GPU board, 221 ... GPU, 222 ... flash memory, 223 ... communication LSI, 230 ... sound I / O board, 231 ... one-chip CPU, 232 ... Flash memory, 233 ... communication LSI, 240 ... upper LED control board, 241 ... one-chip CPU, 242 ... flash memory, 243 ... communication LSI, 250 ... right LED control board, 251 ... one-chip CPU, 252 ... flash memory, 253 ... Communication LSI, 260 ... Left LED control board, 261 ... One-chip CPU, 262 ... Flash memory, 263 ... Communication LSI, 270 ... Lower LED control board, 271 ... One-chip CPU, 272 ... Flash memory, 273 ... Communication 213 ... One-chip CPU, 282 ... Flash memory, 283 ... Communication LSI, 290 ... 24h door monitoring unit, 291 ... One-chip CPU, 292 ... Flash memory, 293 ... Communication LSI

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising a control unit, and a first peripheral control unit and a second peripheral control unit connected to the control unit,
The control unit includes identification information storage means for storing identification information, and transmits the identification information to the first peripheral control unit and the second peripheral control unit at a predetermined timing.
The first peripheral control unit is connected to a first notification device having a notification function,
First reference identification information storage means for storing reference identification information;
First determination means for determining whether or not the identification information received from the control unit matches the reference identification information stored in the first reference identification information storage means;
First notification means for notifying the first notification device when the first determination means determines that they do not match,
The second peripheral control unit is connected to a second notification device having a notification function,
Second reference identification information storage means for storing reference identification information;
Second determination means for determining whether or not the identification information received from the control unit matches the reference identification information stored in the second reference identification information storage means;
Possess when the these do not match the second determination means determines a second notification means for notifying the fact to the second notification unit, a
The first notification device is controlled by the first peripheral control unit and constitutes a light emission effect unit that is turned on and off with a predetermined effect pattern,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second notification device constitutes a movable accessory that is controlled by the second peripheral control unit and is movable in a predetermined performance pattern . The first peripheral control unit includes a first communication abnormality detection unit that detects that a communication abnormality, which is a communication abnormality with the control unit, has occurred,
When the first communication abnormality detection unit detects the occurrence of a communication abnormality, the first notification unit notifies the first notification device to that effect,
The second peripheral control unit has a second communication abnormality detection means for detecting that a communication abnormality that is a communication abnormality with the control unit has occurred,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the second communication abnormality detection unit detects the occurrence of a communication abnormality, the second notification unit notifies the second notification device to that effect.

Images